Ashtadhyayi of Panini on Bhagavad Gita part 1

1

सू�-सू�चः part I

ओ३म ्

Note: Rules used for अच-्सि�धः (combination of vowels) are highlighted in yellow, rules used

for अन�ुवार-सि�धःare highlighted in green and rules used for �वसग�-सि�धः are highlighted in blue.

Rules for हल-्सि�धः(combination of consonants) are in purple. These classifications are not hard

and fast, because some rules could go in more than one category.

Dec 19, 2009

1) 6-1-77 इको यण�चइको यण�चइको यण�चइको यण�च

व�ृ": इकः �थाने यण ् �याद�च सं(हतायां �वषये । When a अच ् letter follows in close proximity

(सं(हतायाम)्, then in place of a इक् letter a यण ्letter is substituted.

गीतासु उदाहरणम ्– /ोकः Bg11-6

बहू1न + अ34पूवा�6ण = बहू�य34पूवा�6ण

2) 6-1-78 एचोऽयवायावःएचोऽयवायावःएचोऽयवायावःएचोऽयवायावः व�ृ": एचः :मादय ्अव ्आय ्आव ्एते �युर�च । When a अच ्letter follows, then in place of the एच ्

letters (‘ए’, ‘ओ’, ‘ऐ’, ‘औ’) there is a respective substitution (ref: 1-3-10 यथासं>यमनदेुशः समानाम)् of

‘अय’्, ‘अव’्, ‘आय’् and ‘आव’्।


उभौ + अ�प = उभाव�प

3) 6-1-87 आBणुःआBणुःआBणुःआBणुः व�ृ": अवणा�द�च परे पूव�परयोरेको गुण आदेशः �यात ्। In place of a preceding अवण�: letter (‘अ’ or ‘आ’)

and a following अच ्letter, there is a single substitute of a गुण: letter (‘अ’, ‘ए’, ‘ओ’)। Note: ‘अ’, ‘ए’

and ‘ओ’ get the गुण-सCDा by the सू�म ्1-1-2 अदेE गुणः।


तव + इदम ्= तवेदम ्

2

4) 6-1-88 व�ृFरे�चव�ृFरे�चव�ृFरे�चव�ृFरे�च

व�ृ": आदे�च परे व�ृFरेकादेशः �यात ्। आBणु�यापवादः । In place of a preceding अवण�: letter (‘अ’ or

‘आ’) and a following एच ्letter (‘ए’, ‘ओ’, ‘ऐ’, ‘औ’) there is a single substitute of a व�ृFः letter (‘आ’,

‘ऐ’, ‘औ’)। Note: ‘आ’, ‘ऐ’ and ‘औ’ get the व�ृF-सCDा by the सू�म ्1-1-1 व�ृFरादैच।्

This rule is an exception to the prior rule 6-1-87 आBणुः।


च + एव = चवै

5) 6-1-101 अकः सवणH दIघ�ःअकः सवणH दIघ�ःअकः सवणH दIघ�ःअकः सवणH दIघ�ः व�ृ": अकः सवणHऽ�च परे पूव�परयोदKघ� एकादेशः �यात ् । When a अक् letter is followed by a

homogeneous (सवण�ः) अच ्letter then in place of these two there is a single substitute of a long

vowel (अच)्।


एव + अLभरM�तु = एवाLभरM�त ु

Jan 9, 2010

6) 6-1-109 एङः पदा�ताद1तएङः पदा�ताद1तएङः पदा�ताद1तएङः पदा�ताद1त

व�ृ": पदा�तादेङोऽ1त परे पूव�Oपमेकादेशः �यात ्। When there is a एE letter (‘ए’, ‘ओ’) at the end of a

पदम ्followed by a अकारः, then in place of these two, there is a single substitute of the prior (एE)

letter. (This coalescence of the अकारः is indicated by the symbol ‘ऽ’ called अवPहः।)


�वQे + अिQनौ = �वQेऽिQनौ

7) 8-2-66 ससजुषो Sससजुषो Sससजुषो Sससजुषो S:

व�ृ": पदा�त�य स�य सजषुT Sः �यात ्। (We will ignore the term ‘सजुष’् because it is used very

rarely.) When a सकारः occurs at the end of a पदम,् it is substituted by ‘Sँ’ (which is the रेफः –

letter ‘र’् – with a distinguishing marker ‘उँ’)।


3

शतशस ्+ अथ = शतशSँ + अथ 8-2-66

Example continued under 6-1-113

8 ) 6-1-113 अतो रोरXलुतादXलुतेअतो रोरXलुतादXलुतेअतो रोरXलुतादXलुतेअतो रोरXलुतादXलुत े

व�ृ": अXलुतादत: पर�य रोS: �यादXलुतेऽ1त । (We will ignore the terms अXलुतादXलुते because they

seldom have application in classical Sanskrit.) When preceded as well as followed by the letter

‘अ’, the letter ‘Sँ’ is substituted by the letter ‘उ’।

Example continued from 8-2-66

शतशSँ + अथ = शतशउ + अथ 6-1-113 = शतशो + अथ 6-1-87 = शतशोऽथ 6-1-109

9) 6-1-114 हLश चहLश चहLश चहLश च

व�ृ": हLश च परतोऽXलुतादत: पर�य रोS: �यात ्। When preceded by a अकारः and followed by a हश ्

letter, the letter ‘Sँ’ is substituted by a उकारः।


�व�तरशस ्+ मया = �व�तरशSँ + मया 8-2-66 = �व�तरशउ + मया 6-1-114 = �व�तरशो + मया 6-1-87

10) 8-3-17 भोभगोअघोअपूव��य योऽLशभोभगोअघोअपूव��य योऽLशभोभगोअघोअपूव��य योऽLशभोभगोअघोअपूव��य योऽLश

व�ृ": एतYपवू��य रोया�देशोऽLश । (For the time being we will ignore the terms भोः, भगोः and अघोः

because their application is limited compared to the remaining part of the rule.) When preceded

by a अवण�ः (अकारः or आकारः) and followed by a अश ्letter, the letter ‘Sँ’ is replaced by a यकारः।


धतृराZस ्+ उवाच = धतृराZSँ + उवाच 8-2-66 = धतृराZय ्+ उवाच 8-3-17


11) 8-3-19 लोपः शाक[य�यलोपः शाक[य�यलोपः शाक[य�यलोपः शाक[य�य

व�ृ": अवण�पूव�योः पदा�तयोय�वयोल\पो वाऽLश परे । In the opinion of the teacher शाक[यः, the letter ‘य’्

or ‘व’् is elided when it occurs at the end of a पदम ्and is preceded by the अवण�ः (‘अ’ or ‘आ’) and

is followed by a letter of the अश-्]Yयाहारः। Note: Since the elision (of the letter ‘य’् or ‘व’्) is only in

the opinion of the teacher शाक[यः (and not in the opinion of all teachers), it implies that the

elision is optional.

As a convention, letter ‘य’् is always elided while the letter ‘व’् is never elided.


4


धतृराZय ्+ उवाच = धतृराZ + उवाच 8-3-19. Note: Due to the rule पूव��ाLसFम ्8-2-1, this dropping of

the यकारः which happens in the ^�पादI section (the last three quarters) of the अ4ा_यायी is not

seen by the rule 6-1-87 आBणुः which is in the सपादस`ा_यायी section (the first seven chapters

and the first quarter of the eight chapter.) Hence 6-1-87 आBणुः does not apply. Final form is

धतृराZ उवाच।

गीतासु (aतीयम ्उदाहरणम ्– /ोकः Bg13-19

उभौ + अ�प = उभाव ्+ अ�प 6-1-78 = उभाव�प

Note: This rule ‘8-3-19 लोपः शाक[य�य’ could also be classified as part of the rules for �वसग�-

सि�ध:। This is because a यकारः (preceded by an अवण�:) at the end of a पदम ्could come in

by 6-1-78 एचोऽयवायावः (which is in the अच-्सि�ध: section) or by 8-3-17 भोभगोअघोअपूव��य योऽLश

(which is in the �वसग�-सि�ध: section).

12) 8-3-23 मोऽनु�वारःमोऽनु�वारःमोऽनु�वारःमोऽनु�वारः व�ृ": मकार�य पद�य अन�ुवार आदेशो भव1त हLल परतः । When the letter ‘म’् occurs at the end of a

पदम ्and is followed by a हल ्letter, it is replaced by an अन�ुवारः (represented by a dot.)


महतीम ्+ चमूम ्= महतीं चमूम ्

13) 8-4-59 वा पदा�त�यवा पदा�त�यवा पदा�त�यवा पदा�त�य

व�ृ": पदा�त�यान�ुवार�य य1य परतो वा परसवणा�देशो भव1त । When an अन�ुवारः occurs at the end

of a पदम ्and is followed by a यय ्letter, then it is optionally substituted by a letter which is सवण�:

with that following यय ्letter.


महतीम ्+ चमूम ्= महतीं चमूम ्or महतीञ ्चमूम ्

Note:

1. In writing the former form (महतीं चमूम)् is generally used, but while pronouncing it is

stylistically better to use the latter form (महतीञ ्चमूम)्

5

2. The five letters c , र ्, श ्, ष ्and स ्do not have any सवण� letters (and hence no सवण� nasal.)

So when the अन�ुवारः precedes one of these five then it remains as अन�ुवार: only.

********Jan 23, 2010**********

14) 1-1-11 ईददेूe (aवचनं ]गfृम ्ईददेूe (aवचनं ]गfृम ्ईददेूe (aवचनं ]गfृम ्ईददेूe (aवचनं ]गfृम ्

व�ृ": ईददेूद� तं (aवचनं ]गfृ ं� यात ्। A dual number affix ending in the letter ‘ई’, ‘ऊ’ or ‘ए’ gets the

designation ‘]गfृ’।

गीतासु उदाहरणम ्– /ोकः bg13-19

अनादI + उभौ The ending ईकारः of the word अनादI ((aतीया-(aवचनम)् gets the designation ‘]गfृ’

by 1-1-11.


15) 6-1-125 Xलुत]गfृा अ�च 1नYयम ्Xलुत]गfृा अ�च 1नYयम ्Xलुत]गfृा अ�च 1नYयम ्Xलुत]गfृा अ�च 1नYयम ्

व�ृ": एतेऽ�च ]कृY या � युः। (We will ignore the term ‘Xलुत’ because it seldom has application in

classical Sanskrit.) Terms which are designated as ‘]गfृ’ retain their natural state when followed

by a vowel. (This means that no सि�धः operations are performed.)



अनादI + उभौ = अनादI + उभौ । Note: 6-1-125 prevents 6-1-77 इको यण�च from applying.

16) 1-4-57 चादयोऽसhवेचादयोऽसhवेचादयोऽसhवेचादयोऽसhवे

व�ृ": चादयो 1नपातसंDा भवि�त न चेत ्सhवे वत��ते । The class of terms beginning with ‘च’ get the

name 1नपात: as long as they don’t convey the sense of a physical thing.


नो is a 1नपात:।

17) 1-1-15 ओत ्ओत ्ओत ्ओत ्

व�ृ": ओद�तो यो 1नपातः स ]गfृसंDो भव1त । A 1नपात: ending in the letter ‘ओ’ gets the name

]गfृ।


6

नो + इह = नो + इह (एचोऽयवायावः 6-1-78 is stopped from applying)

18) 8-3-22 हLल सवHषाम ्हLल सवHषाम ्हLल सवHषाम ्हLल सवHषाम ्

व�ृ": हLल परतो भोभगोअघोअपवू��य यकार�य पदा�त�य लोपो भव1त सवHषामाचाया�णां मतेन। (Just as

we did in rule number 10 above, for the time being we will ignore the terms भोः, भगोः and अघोः)

When a letter of the हल-्]Yयाहारः (consonant) follows then, in the opinion of all teachers, the

यकारः at the end of a पदम ्drops, when it is preceded by the अवण�ः (अकारः or आकारः)।


कामकामास ्+ लभ�ते = कामकामाS + लभ�ते = कामकामाय ्+ लभ�ते = कामकामा + लभ�ते

19) 8-3-15 खरवसानयो�व�सज�नीयखरवसानयो�व�सज�नीयखरवसानयो�व�सज�नीयखरवसानयो�व�सज�नीय:

व�ृ": रेफा�त�य पद�य खjर परतोऽवसाने च �वसज�नीयादेशो भव1त। The letter ‘र’् at the end of a पदम ्

changes to a �वसग�: when it is either followed by a ‘खर’् letter or when nothing follows.


महाYमानस ्+ त ु= महाYमानS + तु = महाYमान: + त ु= महाYमानस ्+ तु (8-3-34)

20) 8-3-34 �वसज�नीय�य सः�वसज�नीय�य सः�वसज�नीय�य सः�वसज�नीय�य सः व�ृ": �वसज�नीय�य सकार आदेशो भव1त खjर परतः। A �वसग�: gets replaced by the letter ‘स’् when a

‘खर’् letter follows.


महाYमानस ्+ त ु= महाYमानS + तु = महाYमान: + त ु= महाYमानस ्+ त ु

21) 8-4-40 �तोः Tुना Tु�तोः Tुना Tु�तोः Tुना Tु�तोः Tुना Tु:::: व�ृ": सकारतवग�योः शकारचवगा�kया ंसि�नपाते शकारचवगा�देशौ भवतः। When the letter ‘स’् or a letter of

the त-वग�: (‘त’्, ‘थ’्, ‘e’, ‘ध’्, ‘न’्) comes in contact with either the letter ‘श’् or a letter of the च-वग�:

(‘च’्, ‘l’, ‘ज’्, ‘झ’्, ‘ञ’्), then it is replaced respectively by ‘श’्, च-वग�: (‘च’्, ‘l’, ‘ज’्, ‘झ’्, ‘ञ’्)।


पाnडवास ्+ च = पाnडवाS + च = पाnडवाः + च = पाnडवास ्+ च = पाnडवाT

7

22) 8-3-36 वा शjरवा शjरवा शjरवा शjर

व�ृ": �वसज�नीय�य �वसज�नीयादेशो वा भव1त शjर परे। When the �वसग�ः is followed by a शर ्letter it

optionally gets replaced by a �वसग�ः।


समस ्+ श�ौ = समSँ + श�ौ 8-2-66 = समर ्+ श�ौ 1-3-2, 1-3-9 = समः + श�ौ 8-3-15 = समः +

श�ौ 8-3-36

OR

समस ्+ श�ौ = समSँ + श�ौ 8-2-66 = समर ्+ श�ौ 1-3-2, 1-3-9 = समः + श�ौ 8-3-15 = समस ्+

श�ौ 8-3-34 = समpश�ौ 8-4-40

23) 8-3-37 कुXवोः कुXवोः कुXवोः कुXवोः ≍≍≍≍कककक≍≍≍≍पौ चपौ चपौ चपौ च

व�ृ": कवग�पवग�योः परतो �वसज�नीय�य यथासं>यं ≍क ≍प इYयेतावादेशौ भवतः चकाराe �वसज�नीयT।

When the �वसग�ः is followed by a letter of the ‘क’ class or ‘प’ class then it is replaced respectively

by ‘≍क’ and ‘≍प’। Optionally it can also stay as a �वसग�ः। The technical name for the ‘≍क’ is

िजqामूलIयः and for the ‘≍प’ is उप_मानीयः।


मामकास ् + पाnडवाः = मामकाSँ + पाnडवाः 8-2-66 = मामकार ् + पाnडवाः 1-3-2, 1-3-9 = मामकाः +

पाnडवाः 8-3-15

OR

मामकास ् + पाnडवाः = मामकाSँ + पाnडवाः 8-2-66 = मामकार ् + पाnडवाः 1-3-2, 1-3-9 = मामकाः +

पाnडवाः 8-3-15 = मामका ≍ पाnडवाः 8-3-37

गीतासु (aतीयम ्उदाहरणम ्– /ोकः bg12-13

मै�स ्+ कSण: = मै�Sँ + कSण: 8-2-66 = मै�र ्+ कSण: 1-3-2, 1-3-9 = मै�ः + कSण: 8-3-15

OR

मै�स ्+ कSण: = मै�Sँ + कSण: 8-2-66 = मै�र ्+ कSण: 1-3-2, 1-3-9 = मै�ः + कSण: 8-3-15 = मै� ≍

कSण: 8-3-37

***********Feb 13, 2010***********

24) 8-2-39 झला ंजशोऽ�तेझला ंजशोऽ�तेझला ंजशोऽ�तेझला ंजशोऽ�त े

8

व�ृ": झलां जश आदेशा भवि�त पद�या�ते वत�मानानाम ्। When a झल ्letter occurs at the end of a

पदम ्it is replaced by a जश ्letter.


मरणात ्+ अ1तjरrयते = मरणाe + अ1तjरrयते

25) 8-4-55 खjर चखjर चखjर चखjर च

व�ृ": खjर च परतो झलां चरादेशो भव1त । A झल ्letter is replaced by a चर ्letter when a खर ्letter

follows.


किTत ्+ कतु�म ्= किTe + कतु�म ्= किTत ्+ कतु�म ्

26) 8-4-56 वावसानेवावसानेवावसानेवावसाने

व�ृ": अवसाने वत�मानानां झलां वा चरादेशो भव1त । A झल ्letter is optionally replaced by a चर ्letter

when nothing follows. (As a convention, in classical Sanskrit, the चर ्substitution always takes

place.)


किTत ्(at the end of the verse) can be written as किTत ्or किTe (by 8.2.39) but as a convention

it will be generally written as किTत ्only.

***********Feb 27, 2010***********

27) 8-3-32 ङमो s�वाद�च ङमुण ्1नYयम ्ङमो s�वाद�च ङमुण ्1नYयम ्ङमो s�वाद�च ङमुण ्1नYयम ्ङमो s�वाद�च ङमुण ्1नYयम ्

व�ृ": s�वात ्परो यो ङम ्तद�तात ्पदाद"ुर�याचो ङमुडागमो भव1त 1नYयम ्। When there is a ङम ्

letter at the end of a पदम ्and this ङम ्letter is preceded by a short vowel, then the following

vowel (long or short) always gets the augment ङमँुt।


कुव�न ्+ अ�प = कुव�न ्+ न ्+ अ�प (1-1-46) = कुव��न�प

28) 1-1-46 आu�तौ टwकतौआu�तौ टwकतौआu�तौ टwकतौआu�तौ टwकतौ

9

व�ृ": आ(द�4त ्भव1त अ�तः wकत ्भव1त षxी1न(द�4�य । An augment which is marked with the letter

‘t’ as a इत ्attaches to the beginning of the term in the genitive case. On the other hand, an

augment which is marked with the letter ‘क्’ as a इत ्attaches to the end of the term in the

genitive case.


कुव�न ्+ अ�प = कुव�न ्+ न ्+ अ�प

29) 8-4-45 यरोऽनुनाLसकेऽनुनाLसको वायरोऽनुनाLसकेऽनुनाLसको वायरोऽनुनाLसकेऽनुनाLसको वायरोऽनुनाLसकेऽनुनाLसको वा व�ृ": यरः पदा�त�याननुाLसके परतो वाननुाLसक आदेशो भव1त । When a nasal sound follows, then a

यर ्letter at the end of a पदम ्is optionally substituted by a nasal. (Even though the rule is

optional, as a convention it is always followed in classical Sanskrit.)


अना(दYवात ्+ 1नगु�णYवात ्= अना(दYवाe + 1नगु�णYवात ्= अना(दYवान ्+ 1नगु�णYवात ्

March 13, 2010

30) 8-4-60 तोLल�तोLल�तोLल�तोLल� व�ृ": तवग��य लकारे परतः परसवणा�देशो भव1त । 8-4-60 तोLल� – When the letter ‘ल’् follows, then in

place of any of the five dental letters (‘त’्, ‘थ’्, ‘e’, ‘ध’्, ‘न’्) there is a substitute which is परसवण�:

(सवण�: with the following letter ‘ल’्)। This implies that ‘त’्, ‘थ’्, ‘e’ or ‘ध’् changes to ‘ल’्; but ‘न’्

changes to ‘ल ्ँ ’।


इमान ्+ लोकान ्= इमालँ◌्लोकान ्।

31) 8-4-62 झयो होऽ�यतर�याम ्झयो होऽ�यतर�याम ्झयो होऽ�यतर�याम ्झयो होऽ�यतर�याम ्

व�ृ": झय उ"र�य हकार�य पूव�सवणा�देशो भवYय�यतर�याम ्। When a झय ्letter precedes, then in

place of the letter ‘c’ there is optionally a substitute which is पूव�सवण�: (सवण�: with the preceding

झय ्letter).


10

एतe + (ह = एतe(ह or एत�F

Note: Even though this rule is optional, in practice it is generally applied – so the second form

given above is more common.

32) 8-4-63 शpछोऽ(टशpछोऽ(टशpछोऽ(टशpछोऽ(ट

व�ृ": झय उ"र�य शकार�या(ट परतpछकारादेशो भवYय�यतर�याम ् । When a झय ् letter precedes,

then the letter श ्is optionally substituted by the letter l, if an अt letter follows.


यe + शोकम ्= यe + शोकम ्8-2-39 = यज ्+ शोकम ्8-4-40 = यच ्+ शोकम ्8-4-55 = यrछोकम ्

33) 8-3-4 अनुनाLसकात ्परोऽनु�वारअनुनाLसकात ्परोऽनु�वारअनुनाLसकात ्परोऽनु�वारअनुनाLसकात ्परोऽनु�वार:

व�ृ": अननुाLसकं �वहाय रोः पूव��माYपरोऽन�ुवारागमः �यात ्। This rule applies to the section 8-3-

5 to 8-3-12. In this section, if the letter preceding ‘Sँ’ is not nasalized then following that letter

(which precedes ‘Sँ’) the अन�ुवार: comes as an augment. Note: As a convention in classical

Sanskrit, this rule 8-3-4 (by which the अन�ुवार: comes as an augment) is always preferred to

rule 8-3-2 (which would have nasalized the letter preceding ‘Sँ’)।

उदाहरणम ्– See example under 8-3-7

34) 8-3-7 नpछ{य]शान ्नpछ{य]शान ्नpछ{य]शान ्नpछ{य]शान ्

व�ृ": नकारा�त�य पद�य ]शा�विज�त�य Sभ�वYय|परे छ�व परतः। We will ignore the term ‘अ]शान’्

because it has very rare application. When the letter ‘न’् occurs at the end of a पदम ् it is

substituted by ‘Sँ’ when a letter of the ‘छव’्-]Yयाहार: follows as long as the letter of the ‘छव’्-

]Yयाहार: is followed by letter of the ‘अम’्-]Yयाहार:।


तान ्+ तथा = ताSँ + तथा 8-3-7 = ताSँं + तथा 8-3-4 = तांर ्+ तथा 1-3-2, 1-3-9 = तां: + तथा 8-3-

15 = ता�ंतथा 8-3-34

**********March 27, 2010***********

35) 6-1-132 एत"दोः सुलोपोऽकोरनCसमासे हLलएत"दोः सुलोपोऽकोरनCसमासे हLलएत"दोः सुलोपोऽकोरनCसमासे हLलएत"दोः सुलोपोऽकोरनCसमासे हLल

व�ृ": अककारयोरेत"दोय�: सु�त�य लोपो हLल न त ुनCसमासे । We will ignore the terms अकोरनCसमासे

because they have only rare application. The affix सँु (nominative singular case ending) applied

to the ]ा1तप(दकम ्(nominal base) तe or एतe is dropped when any consonant (हल)् follows.

11


सस ्+ श}दः = स + श}दः (Note: सस ्is the masculine nominative singular form of the ]ा1तप(दकम ्

(nominal base) तe)

(aतीयम ्उदाहरणम ्– /ोकः Bg3-37

एषस ् + :ोध: = एष + :ोधः (Note: एषस ् is the masculine nominative singular form of the

]ा1तप(दकम ्(nominal base) एतe)

36) 8-3-14 रो jररो jररो jररो jर

व�ृ": रेफ�य रेफे परतो लोपो भव1त । The letter ‘र’् (referred to as रेफ:) is dropped when followed by

the letter ‘र’्।

गीतासु उदाहरणम ्न अि�त ।

_यान/ोके उदाहरणम ्-

चमूस ्रामाय = चमूर ्रामाय 8-2-66 = चमू रामाय

37) 6-3-111 ~लोपे पूव��य दIघ\ऽण~लोपे पूव��य दIघ\ऽण~लोपे पूव��य दIघ\ऽण~लोपे पूव��य दIघ\ऽण:

व�ृ": ढकाररेफयोल\पो यि�मन ्स ~लोप:, त� पवू��याणो दIघ\ भव1त । When the letter ‘�’ or ‘र’् is

dropped then the prior अण ्letter gets elongated.

चमूस ् रामाय = चमूर ् रामाय 8-2-66 = चमू रामाय 8-3-14 = चमू रामाय (No change in this case

because the vowel ऊ of चमू was already long.)

देवीमाहाY|ये (ततृीये अ_याये) उदाहरणम ्-

तेजोLभस ्+ र�व^ब|बम ् = तेजोLभर ् + र�व^ब|बम ्8-2-66 = तेजोLभ + र�व^ब|बम ्8-3-14 = तेजोभी +

र�व^ब|बम ्

END OF SECTION ON पदा�तसि�ध:

38) 4-1-2 (सु-औ-जस)्-(अम-्औt-शस)्-(टा-kयाम-्Lभस)्-(ङे-kयाम-्kयस)्-(ङLस-kयाम-्kयस)्-(ङस-्ओस-्आम)्-

(�ङ-ओस-्सुप)्

व�ृ": ङI-आप-्]ा1तप(दकात ्सु-आदय: ]Yयया: भवि�त। The (twenty-one) affixes (case-endings) सँु etc

are used after a ]ा1तप(दकम ्and also after a term ending in the (feminine) affix ङI or आप.्

12


धम�Mे� + �ङ = धम�Mे� + इ 1-3-8 = धम�Mे� े6-1-87

39) 3-4-78 (1तप-्तस-्6झ)-(Lसप-्थस-्थ)-(Lमप-्वस-्मस)्-(त-आताम-्झ)-(थास-्आथाम-्_वम)्-(इt-व(ह-म(हE)

व�ृ": ल�य 1तप-्आदय: आदेशा भवि�त। In place of ल ्(which stands for the ten tenses and moods)

the (eighteen) substitutions 1तप ्etc are used.


करो1त – detailed steps will be discussed in later classes. For now, please note the ending 1त

(1तप)्

Every word in the Sanskrit language has to end in one of these (21 + 18 =) 39 affixes mentioned

in the above two rules.

April 10, 2010

40) 1-2-45 अथ�वदधातुर]Yयय: ]ा1तप(दकम ्

व�ृ": अथ�वrछ}दOपं ]ा1तप(दकसंDं भव1त धातु]Yययौ वज�1यYवा । A word form that has meaning is

called a ]ा1तप(दकम ्but this does not include verbal roots or affixes or terms which end in an affix.


पाnडव is a ]ा1तप(दकम ्

41) 1-2-46 कृ"�FतसमासाT

व�ृ": कृ"�Fता�तौ समासाT ]1तप(दकसंDा: �यु: । A word form that ends in a ‘कृत’् affix or a ‘त�Fत’

affix and so also compounds get the name ]ा1तप(दकम।् Note: Affixes designated as ‘कृत’् occur in

the अ4ा_यायी from 3-1-93 to the end of the third chapter. Affixes designated as ‘त�Fत’ start

from 4-1-76 and go to the end of the fifth chapter.


धम�Mे� is a ]ा1तप(दकम ्since it is a compound formation

मामक is a ]ा1तप(दकम ्since it is a term ending in a त�Fत affix

42) 4-1-1 EयाX]ा1तप(दकात ्

13

व�ृ": अ�धकारोऽयम ्– आपCचमा_यायसमा`े: । This rule sets the topic for the section from 4-1-1 to

the end of the fifth chapter. So for all the affixes listed in this section the base should be either a

term ending in the feminine affix ङI or आप;् or it should be a ]ा1तप(दकम.्


तामसी + सँु – since तामसी is term ending in the feminine affix ङI, it can take the declension affix

सँु

आवतृा + सँु – since आवतृा is term ending in the feminine affix आप,् it can take the declension

affix सँु

Note: In the both the above examples the स ्of सँु drops by 6-1-68

बु�F + सँु – since बु�F is a ]ा1तप(दकम,् it can take the declension affix सँु

43) 3-1-1 ]Yयय:


the end of the fifth chapter. So the terms that are listed in this section will get the name ]Yयय:

(an affix.)


धतृराZ + सँु – since सँु is prescribed by 4-1-2 (which is in the section from 3-1-1 to the end of the

fifth chapter), it is a ]Yयय:

44) 3-1-2 परT


the end of the fifth chapter. Affixes come after the term to which they are prescribed.


धतृराZ + सँु – since सँु is a ]Yयय: it will come after the term (धतृराZ) to which it is prescribed.

45) 1-4-103 सुप:

व�ृ": सुप�ी6ण �ी6ण वचना�येकश एकवचन-(aवचन-बहुवचनसCDा1न �यु: । The सुप ्affixes listed in 4-

1-2 are in sets of three and in each set there is a singular, dual and plural affix.


14

धतृराZ + सँु – In 4-1-2 the first set (]थमा-�वभ��: – nominative case) of three affixes is ‘सँु’

(singular), ‘औ’ (dual) and ‘जस’् (plural.) Since the intention of the speaker is to use the nominative

case and since ‘धतृराZ’ is a singular form, we use the affix ‘सँु’।

46) 6-1-102 ]थमयो: पूव�सवण�:

व�ृ": अक: ]थमा(aतीययोर�च पूव�सवण�दIघ� एकादेश: �यात ्। When an अक् letter is followed by a

vowel (अच)् of the first (nominative) or second (accusative) case then for the two of them (अक् +

अच)् there is a single substitute which is the elongated form of the first member (the अक् letter.)


ि�थत + औ masculine nominative dual. Here the present rule would have applied to make a

single substitute ‘आ’ in place of (the ending) ‘अ’ (of ‘ि�थत’) and ‘औ’ – but the next rule stops this

operation.

47) 6-1-104 ना(द�च

व�ृ": आe इ�च न पवू�सवण�दIघ�: । The पूव�सवण�दIघ�ः substitute (ordained by ]थमयोः पूव�सवण�ः 6-1-

102) shall not take place when an इच ्letter follows an अवण�: (long ‘आ’: or short ‘अ’)।


ि�थत + औ Here we have ‘अ’ (of ‘ि�थत’) followed by ‘औ’ (an इच ्letter) so the prior rule is

prohibited. We apply6-1-88 to get the form ि�थतौ।

April 24, 2010

48) 1-3-7 चुटू

व�ृ": ]Yययाuौ चुटू इतौ �तः । When a letter of the च-class (‘च’्, ‘l’, ‘ज’्, ‘झ’्, ‘ञ’्) or the t-class (‘t’,

‘�’, ‘�’, ‘�’, ‘ण’्) occurs at the beginning of a ]Yयय: then it is designated as an इत.्


पाnडव + जस ्The letter ‘ज’् at the beginning of the affix ‘जस’् is an इत ्(marker.)

49) 1-4-104 �वभ��T

व�ृ": सु1`ङौ �वभ��संDौ �तः । The 21 ‘सँुप’् affixes (nominal case endings listed in 4-1-2) and the

18 ‘1तE’ affixes (verbal endings listed in 3-4-78) get the designation of �वभ��:।


15

पाnडव + जस ्The affix ‘जस’् gets the designation �वभ��: since it is one of the 21 ‘सुप’् affixes.

50) 1-3-4 न �वभ�ौ त�ुमा:

व�ृ": �वभ��था�तवग�सकारमकारा नेत: । Any letter of the ‘त’्-class (‘त’्, ‘थ’्, ‘e’, ‘ध’्, ‘न’्) or the letter

‘स’् or ‘म’् which is in a �वभ��: does not get the designation ‘इत’्।


पाnडव + जस ्The ending letter ‘स’् of the affix ‘जस’् is not an ‘इत’्। This is an exception to rule 1-

3-3.

51) 2-3-49 एकवचनं स|ब�ुF:

व�ृ": स|बोधने ]थमाया एकवचनं स|ब�ुFसंDं �यात ्। The nominative singular affix (‘सँु’) when used

in a vocative form gets the designation स|ब�ुF:।


सCजय + सँु Here the nominative singular affix सँु is used as an address (vocative) and hence it

gets the designation स|बु�F:

52) 1-4-13 य�माY]Yयय�व�ध�तदा(द ]YययेऽEगम ्

व�ृ": य: ]Yययो य�मात ्w:यते तदा(द श}द�वOपं ति�म�नEगं �यात ्। When an affix is prescribed to

come after a term, then the word form starting with that term up to the affix is said to be the

अEगम ्(base) in relation to that affix.


सCजय + सँु The अEगम ्for the affix ‘सँु’ is सCजय.

53) 6-1-69 एEs�वात ्स|बFुे:

व�ृ": एङ�ताe ��वा�ताrचाEगाFल ्लुXयते स|बुFेTेत ्। Following an अEगम ्ending in ‘एE’ (‘ए’ or ‘ओ’)

or a short vowel, a consonant is dropped if it belongs to a स|बु�F: affix.


सCजय + सँु = सCजय + स ्1-3-2 = सCजय

54) 6-1-107 अLम पवू�:

16

व�ृ": अकोऽ|य�च पवू�Oपमेकादेश: �यात ्। In place of a preceding ‘अक्’ letter and the following vowel

(‘अच’्) belonging to the affix ‘अम’् there is a single substitute of that preceding अक् letter.


आचाय� + अम ्= आचाय ्� + अ + अ + म ्= आचाय ्� + अ + म ्= आचाय�म ्

55) 1-3-8 लश�वत�Fते

व�ृ": त�Fतविज�त]Yययाuा लशकवगा� इत: �यु: । When the letter ल ्or श ्or any letter of the क-class

(क्, ख,् ग,् घ,् E) occurs at the beginning of a ]Yयय:, which is not a त�Fत:, then it is designated as

an इत.् Note: त�Fता: ]Yयया: are listed in the अ4ा_यायी from 4-1-76 to the end of the fifth chapter.


आचाय� + शस ्The letter श ्at the beginning of the affix शस ्(prescribed by 4-1-2) is an इत ्

56) 6-1-103 त�माrछसो न: पुंLस

व�ृ": पूव�सवण�दIघा�त ्परो य: शस: स�त�य न: �यात ्पुLंस । In the masculine gender, when the letter

‘स’् of the affix ‘शस’् follows a vowel which has been elongated by 6-1-102 then it is replaced by

the letter ‘न’्।


आचाय� + शस ्= आचाय� + अस ्1-3-8 = आचाया�स ्6-1-102 = आचाया�न ्

May 8, 2010

57) 8-4-2 अtकुXवाEन|ु{यवायेऽ�प

व�ृ": अt, कवग�, पवग�, आE, नुँम ्एतै{य��तैय�थास|भव ं LमLलतैT {यवधानेऽ�प रषाkयां पर�य न�य ण:

समानपदे। The letter ‘न’् is replaced by ‘ण’् when either ‘र’् or ‘ष’् precedes, even if intervened by a

letter of the अt-]Yयाहार: or by a letter of the क-वग�: or प-वग�ः or the term ‘आE’ or ‘नुँम’् (अन�ुवारः)

either singly or in any combination.


By the present rule the ending ‘न’् of आचाया�न ्would have changed to ‘ण’् but the next rule blocks

this operation.

58) 8-4-37 पदा�त�य

व�ृ": न�य णो न । The letter ‘न’् is not replaced by ‘ण’् when it is at the end of a पदम।्

17


The ‘न’् of आचाया�न ्does not change to ‘ण’् even though all the conditions of the prior rule are

satisfied, because आचाया�न ्has the पद-संDा by 1-4-14.

59) 7-1-12 टाङLसँङसाLमनाY�या:

व�ृ": अद�तात ्टादIनाLमनादय: �यु: । Following a अEगम ्ending in the letter ‘अ’, the affixes ‘टा’,

‘ङLसँ’ and ‘ङस’् are replaced respectively by ‘इन’, ‘आत’् and ‘�य’।


�पुदपु� + टा = �पुदपु� + इन = �पुदपु�ने 6-1-87 = �पुदपु�णे 8-4-2

/ोकः Bg2-62

काम + ङLसँ = काम + आत ्= कामात ्6-1-101 = कामाe 8-2-39 or optionally कामात ्8-4-56

/ोकः Bg1-23

धात�राZ + ङस ्= धात�राZ�य

60) 7-3-102 सु�प च

व�ृ": यञादौ सँु�प अतोऽEग�य दIघ�: । The ending letter ‘अ’ of a ]ा1तप(दकम ्is elongated if it is

followed by a सँुप ्affix beginning with a letter of the यञ-्]Yयाहार:।

देवीमाहाY|ये उदाहरणम ्– /ोकः Bg5-1

असुर + kयाम ्= असुराkयाम ्

61) 7-1-9 अतो Lभस ऐस ्

व�ृ": अद�ताe अEगात ्पर�य Lभस ऐस ्�यात ्। Following a अEगम ्ending in the letter ‘अ’, the affix

‘Lभस’् is replaced by ‘ऐस’्।


दोष + Lभस ्= दोष + ऐस ्= दोषै: 6-1-88

62) 7-1-13 ङेय�:

व�ृ": अतोऽEगात ्पर�य ङेया�देश: । Following a ]ा1तप(दकम ्ending in ‘अ’, the affix ‘ङे’ is replaced by

‘य’।

18

Please see example under next rule.

May 22, 2010

63) 1-1-56 �था1नवदादेशोऽनि[वधौ

व�ृ": आदेश: �था1नवत ्�यात,् न तु �था�यला�य�वधौ । A substitute (आदेश:) is regarded as the item

that it substituted (�थानी) – except in the case of an operation which depends on a specific letter

(अल)् of the �थानी.


�वमोM + ङे = �वमोM + य 7-1-13. Now since the substitute ‘य’ came in place of ‘ङे’ it will be

regarded as ‘ङे’ which is part of the सँुप-्]Yयाहार: This will allow us to use 7-3-102.

�वमोM + य = �वमोMाय

64) 7-3-103 बहुवचने झ[येत ्

व�ृ": झलादौ बहुवचने सँु�प, अतोऽEग�यकैारः । The ending ‘अ’ of a अEगम ्changes to ‘ए’ when

followed by a plural सँुप ्affix beginning with a झल ्letter.


सव�काम + kयस ्= सव�कामेkय:

65) 7-3-104 ओLस च

व�ृ": ओLस परे अतोऽEग�यकैार: । The ending अकार: of a अEगम ् is replaced by एकार: when

followed by the affix ‘ओस’्।


केशवाजु�न + ओस ्= केशवाजु�ने + ओस ्= केशवाजु�नयो: 6-1-78

66) 7-1-54 s�वनuापो नुt

व�ृ": s�वा�ताe नuा�ताe आब�ताrचाEगात ्पर�यामो नुडागम: । The affix ‘आम’् takes the augment

‘नुँt’ when it follows a ]ा1तप(दकम ्which either ends in a short vowel or has the नदI-सCDा or ends

in the feminine affix ‘आप’्।

Please see example under the next rule.

19

67) 6-4-3 नाLम

व�ृ": नाLम परे अज�ताEग�य दIघ�: । The ending vowel of an अEगम ्gets elongated if followed by

the term ‘नाम’् ।


वेद + आम ्= वेद + नाम ्7-1-54, 1-1-46 = वेदानाम ्

68) 8-3-59 आदेश]Yयययो:

व�ृ": इnकुkयां पर�याऽपदा�त�यादेश: ]YययावयवT य: स�त�य मूध��यादेश: । The letter ‘स’् is

replaced by the cerebral ‘ष’् when preceded either by a letter of the इण-्]Yयाहार: or a letter of the

क-वग�: (‘क्’, ‘ख’्, ‘ग’्, ‘घ’्, ‘E’)। This substitution only takes place if the ‘स’् is an आदेश: (substitute)

or part of a ]Yयय: (affix.)


भाव + सुप ्= भाव + सु 1-3-3 = भावे सु 7-3-103 = भावेष ु

June 12, 2010

69) 1-1-27 सवा�दI1न सव�नामा1न

व�ृ": सवा�दI1न श}द�वOपा6ण सव�नामसंDा1न �यु: । The list of terms starting with ‘सव�’ are called

सव�नामा1न (pronouns.)


70) 7-1-17 जस: शी

व�ृ": अद�तात ्सव�ना|नो जस: शी �यात ्। Following a pronoun ending in short ‘अ’ the nominative

plural ending ‘जस’् is replaced by ‘शी’।


अ�य + जस ्The term ‘अ�य’ is in the list of terms सवा�दI1न in 1-1-27. Hence it gets the सव�नाम-

संDा (it is a pronoun) and जस ्is to be replaced by शी.

At this stage the next rule comes into play

71) 1-1-52 अलोऽ�Yय�य

20

व�ृ": षxी1न(द�4�या�Yय�याल आदेश: �यात ्। A substitute (आदेश:) takes the place of the ending

letter (अल)् of the term which is in the sixth case (in the सू�म ्which prescribes the substitution.)

In the सू�म ्7-1-17, the term जस: is the sixth case of जस.् Hence by the present rule only the

ending letter स ्of जस ्would be replaced by शी. But the next rule applies.

72) 1-1-55 अनेकाि[शत ्सव��य

व�ृ": अनेकाल ्य आदेश: Lशrच, स सव��य षxी1न(द�4�य �थाने �यात ्। A substitute (आदेश:) which is

अनेकाल ्(has more than one letter) or has श ्as a marker, takes the place of the entire term

which is in the sixth case (in the सू�म ्which prescribes the substitution.)

Therefore शी replaces the entire affix जस,् and we get अ�य + शी = अ�य + ई 1-3-8 = अ�ये 6-1-

87

73) 7-2-102 YयदादIनाम:

व�ृ": Yय(दYयेवमादIनामकारादेशो भव1त �वभ�ौ परत: । (aपय��तानामेवे�4: । The ending letter (see 1-

1-52) of the pronouns, starting with ‘Yयe’ and ending with ‘(a’, is replaced by ‘अ’ when followed by

a �वभ��: affix.

गीता_याने उदाहरणम ्– अि�तम/ोक:

तe + ङे = त अ + ङे using 1-4-104 and the present rule. At this stage 6-1-101 अक: सवणH दIघ�:

would apply. But the next rule stops that.

74) 6-1-97 अतो गुणे

व�ृ": अकारादपदा�ताe गुणे परत: पूव�परयो: �थाने परOपमेकादेशो भव1त । In the place of the letter ‘अ’

which is not at the end of a पदम,् and the following गुण: letter, there is single substitute of the

latter (the गुण: letter.)

Therefore त अ + ङे = त + ङे Now the next rule applies.

75) 7-1-14 सव�ना|न: �मै

व�ृ": अत: सव�ना|नो ‘ङे’ इYय�य �मै �यात ्। Following a pronoun ending in the letter ‘अ’, the affix

‘ङे’ is replaced by ‘�मै’।

Hence त + ङे = त�मै

76) 7-1-15 ङLसEयो: �मािY�मनौ

व�ृ": अत: सव�ना|नो ङLसEयो: �मािY�मनौ �त: । Following a pronoun ending in ‘अ’, the affixes ङLस

and �ङ are replaced respectively by �मात ्and ि�मन ्।

21


तe + ङLस = त अ + ङLस 7-2-102 = त + ङLस 6-1-97 = त�मात ्

/ोकः Bg6-22

यe + �ङ = य अ + �ङ 7-2-102 = य + �ङ 6-1-97 = यि�मन ्

77) 7-1-52 आLम सव�ना|न: सुt

व�ृ": अवणा��तात ्पर�य सव�ना|नो �व(हत�याम: सँुडागम: । The affix ‘आम’् prescribed to a pronoun

(सव�नाम-श}द:) takes the augment ‘सँुt’ when the base (अEगम)् ends in a अवण�: (अकार: or

आकार:)।


तe + आम ्= त अ + आम ्7-2-102 = त + आम ्6-1-97 = त साम ्using the present rule (and 1-1-

46, 1-3-2, 1-3-3) = ते साम ्7-3-103 = तेषाम ्8-3-59

June 26, 2010

79) 7-3-109 जLस च

व�ृ": जLस परतो s�वा�त�याEग�य गुणो भव1त । When the affix ‘जस’् follows, there is a गुण:

substitute for the (ending letter of) of an अEगम ्ending in a short vowel.


युयYुसु + जस ्= ययुुYसो + जस ्= ययुुYसो + अस ्1-3-7, 1-3-4 = युयYुसव ्+ अस ्6-1-78 = युयYुसव: 8-

2-66, 8-3-15

80) 7-3-108 s�व�य गुण:

व�ृ": s�वा�त�याEग�य गुणो भव1त स|बFुौ परतः । When the स|ब�ुF: affix follows, there is a गुण:

substitute for the (ending letter of) of an अEगम ्ending in a short vowel.


]भु + सँु By 2-3-49 the affix सँु in this example is called स|बु�F: because it is used as an address.

Then by the present rule we get ]भो + सँु = ]भो 6-1-69

81) 1-4-7 शेषो �यस6ख

व�ृ": अनदIसंDौ s�वौ या�वदतुौ तद�तं स6खवज� 1घसंDम ्। When a short ‘इ’ ending or short ‘उ’

ending term – except for ‘स6ख’ – does not have the नदI-सCDा then it gets the 1घ-सCDा।

22


हेतु + टा The ]ा1तप(दकम ्‘हेतु’ has the 1घसंDा which allows the next rule to operate

82) 7-3-120 आङो नाऽि�याम ्

व�ृ": घे: पर�याङो ना �यादि�याम ्। आE इ1त टासCDा । Following a अEगम ्having 1घ-सCDा, the

affix ‘आE’ is replaced by ‘ना’, but not in the feminine gender. ‘आE’ is an ancient name for the

(instrumental singular) affix ‘टा’।


हेतु + टा = हेतनुा

83) 7-3-111 घे�ङ�1त

व�ृ": 1घसंDक�य �ङ1त सँु�प गुण: । When a �ङत ्सँुप ्affix follows, then an अEगम ्having the 1घ-

सCDा takes the गुण: substitution. Note: By 1-1-52 the गुण: substitution will take place for the

ending letter (in this case ‘इ’ or ‘उ’) of the अEगम।्


मनु + ङे = मनो + ए 1-3-8 = मनो + ए 7-3-111, 1-1-52 = मनवे 6-1-78

84) 6-1-110 ङLसँङसोTङLसँङसोTङLसँङसोTङLसँङसोT

व�ृ": एङो ङLसँङसोर1त पूव�Oपमेकादेश: । In place of a preceding एE (‘ए’, ‘ओ’) letter and the following

short ‘अ’ of the affix ‘ङLसँ’ or ‘ङस’्, there is a single substitute of the former (एE letter.)


हjर + ङस ्= हjर + अस ्1-3-8, 1-3-9, 1-3-4 = हर ्ए + अ स ्7-3-111, 1-1-52 = हर ्ए स ्6-1-110 =

हरे: 8-2-66, 8-3-15

85) 7-3-119 अrच घे:

व�ृ": इदeुkयामु"र�य ङेरौत,् घेरrच । Following a short ‘इ’ or short ‘उ’ ending अEगम,् the affix ‘�ङ’ is

replaced by ‘औ’ and the (ending letter ‘इ’ or ‘उ’ of the) अEगम ्which has the 1घ-सCDा is replaced

by short ‘अ’।


अि�न + �ङ = अ�न + औ = अ�नौ 6-1-88

23

July 10, 2010

86) 8-3-35 शप�रे �वसज�नीय:

व�ृ": शप�रे खjर परत: �वसज�नीय�य �वसज�नीयादेशो भव1त । When a खर+्शर ्conjunct follows a

�वसग�: then the �वसग�: is replaced by a �वसग�: itself. This implies that no other operation is

allowed. The �वसग�: has to be completely pronounced. So it sounds as if there is a �वराम: (full

stop) after the �वसग�: Note: The most common example of a खर+्शर ्conjunct is M ्


ऋषयस ् Mीणक[मषा: = ऋषय: Mीणक[मषा: 8-2-66, 8-3-15 = ऋषय: Mीणक[मषा: which is

pronounced like ऋषय: | Mीणक[मषा:

87) 7-1-93 अनँE सौ

व�ृ": स>युरEग�यानँङादेशोऽस|बFुौ सौ । अनँE is substituted for the अEगम ्(base) स6ख when the

non-vocative affix सँु follows.


88) 1-1-53 �ङrच

व�ृ": �ङदनेकालXय�Yय�यवै �यात ् । A �ङत ्substitute (substitute which has the letter ‘E’ as a

marker), even if it is अनेकाल ्(having more than one letter), takes place of only the last letter of

the term being substituted.


स6ख + सँु = सख ्इ + सँु = सख ्अन ्+ सँु 7-1-93, 1-3-2, 1-3-3

89) 1-1-65 अलोऽ�Yयात ्पवू� उपधा

व�ृ": अ�Yयादल: पवू\ वण� उपधा-संD: । The penultimate letter of a term is called उपधा.


Continuing from above example, we are at the stage सखन ्+ सँु Now, in the term सखन ्(= सख ्

अ न)् the penultimate letter ‘अ’ gets the designation उपधा।

90) 1-1-43 सँुडनपुंसक�य

24

व�ृ": �वा(दपCचवचना1न सव�नाम�थानसंDा1न �युर�लIब�य । The five affixes ‘सँु’, ‘औ’, ‘जस’्, ‘अम’् and

‘औt’ get the designation सव�नाम�थानम ्but not if the base is neuter.


In our example (from above) the affix ‘सँु’ gets the designation सव�नाम�थानम।्

91) 6-4-8 सव�नाम�थाने चाऽस|बFुौ

व�ृ": ना�त�योपधाया दIघ\ऽस|बFुौ सव�नाम�थाने । The penultimate letter of the अEगम ् (base)

ending in a नकार: gets elongated if it is followed by a non-vocative affix having the designation

सव�नाम�थानम।्


सखन ्+ सँु = सखान ्+ सँु = सखान ्+ स ्1-3-2

92) 1-2-41 अप�ृ एकाल ्]Yयय:

व�ृ": एकाल ्]Yयय: य:, सोऽप�ृसंD: �यात ्। An affix which has only one letter gets the designation

अप�ृ:।


Continuing from above example: सखान ्+ स ्। The affix ‘स’् gets the designation अप�ृ:।

93) 6-1-68 ह[Eया}kयो दIघा�त ्सँु1त�यप�ंृ हल ्ह[Eया}kयो दIघा�त ्सँु1त�यप�ंृ हल ्ह[Eया}kयो दIघा�त ्सँु1त�यप�ंृ हल ्ह[Eया}kयो दIघा�त ्सँु1त�यप�ंृ हल ्

व�ृ": हल�तात ्परम,् दIघ� यौ Eयापौ तद�ताrच परम,् ’सँु-1त-Lस’ इYयेतe अप�ंृ हल ्लुXयते । A single

letter affix ‘सँु’, ‘1त’ or ‘Lस’ is dropped following a base ending in a consonant or in the long

feminine affix ‘ङI’ or ‘आप’्।


Continuing from above example: सखान ्+ स ्= सखान ्

94) 8-2-7 नलोप: ]ा1तप(दका�त�य

व�ृ": ]ा1तप(दकसंDकं यYपदं तद�त�य न�य लोप: �यात ्। The ending नकार: of a पदम ्is dropped

when the पदम ्also has the designation ]ा1तप(दकम।्

25


Continuing from above example: सखान ्= सखा

July 24, 2010

95) 7-1-92 स>युरस|बुFौ

व�ृ": स>युरEगात ्परं स|ब�ुFवज� सव�नाम�थानं 6णaत ्�यात ्। When following the word स6ख that

has the designation अEगम,् the non-vocative affixes that have the designation सव�नाम�थानम ्

behave as if they have णकारः as an indicatory letter.

उदाहरणम ्– स6ख + औ – औ gets the designation सव�नाम�थानम ्by 1-1-43 and becomes 6णaत ्

by the present rule.

96) 7-2-115 अचो िCण1त

व�ृ": अज�ताEग�य व�ृFः, �ञ1त 6ण1त च परे । A vowel ending अEगम ्gets a व�ृFः substitute, when

followed by a ]Yययः that has ञकारः or a णकारः as an indicatory letter.

Continuing from above example: स6ख + औ = सख ै+ औ = सखायौ 6-1-78

97) 6-1-112 >यYयाYपर�य

व�ृ": ‘6ख-1त’श}दाkयां ‘खी-ती’श}दाkयां कृतयणादेशाkया ं पर�य ङLसँ-ङसोरत उः । The अकारः of ङLसँ

and ङस ्gets उकारः as a substitute when preceded by the term 6ख, 1त, खी, or ती on which the यण ्

substitution has taken place.


स6ख + ङस ्= स6ख + अस ्1-3-8 = स>य ्अस ्6-1-77 = स>यःु 6-1-112, 8-2-66, 8-3-15

98) 7-3-118 औत ्

व�ृ": इदeुkयां पर�य ङेरौत ्। The affix ‘�ङ’ following a short ‘इ’ or short ‘उ’ gets ‘औ’ as a substitute.

उदाहरणम ्– स6ख + �ङ = स6ख + औ = स>यौ 6-1-77

99) 1-4-8 प1तः समास एव

व�ृ": 1घ-सCDः । The word प1त gets the designation 1घ only when it is part of a compound.

उदाहरणम ्– प1त + ङस ्= प1त + अस ्1-3-8 = पYय ्+ अस ्6-1-77 = पYयुः 6-1-112, 8-2-66, 8-3-15

Example in समासः – भूप1त + ङस ्= भूप1त + अस ्1-3-8 = भूपते + अस ्7-3-111 = भूपतेः 6-1-110, 8-

2-66, 8-3-15

26

100) 1-1-23 बहु-गण-वतुँ-ड1त सE>या

व�ृ": बहु गण वतुँ ड1त इYयेते सं>यासंDा भवि�त । The words बहु, गण and the words ending in the

वतुँ and ड1त affixes get the designation सं>या.

101) 1-1-25 ड1त च

व�ृ": डYय�ता सE>या षtसCDा �यात ्। Terms that have the सं>या-सCDा and end in the ड1त-]Yयय:

get the षt-सCDा।

उदाहरणम ्– ‘क1त’ is a सE>या ending in the affix ड1त and so it gets the designation षt।

102) 7-1-22 ष�kयो लुक्

व�ृ": जpशसोः । The affixes जस ्and शस ्take the लुक् elision when they follow the words that are

designated षt।

उदाहरणम ्– क1त + जस ्– जस ्takes लुक्

103) 1-1-61 ]Yयय�य लु�/ुलुपः

व�ृ": लुक्-/ु-लुX श}दैः कृतं ]Yययादश�नं :मात ्त"YसCDं �यात ्। The elisions of affixes that are done

using the words लुक्, /ु and लुप ्get these words as their names, respectively.

Continuing from above example: क1त + जस ्= क1त 7-1-22 since लुक् is a type of लोप:(elision.)

104) 1-1-62 ]Yयय-लोपे ]Yयय-लMणम ्

व�ृ": ]Yयये लु`े तदा��तं काय� �यात ्। When an affix takes लोपः(elision), the operations that were

ordained by that affix, shall be carried out.

Continuing from above example: क1त + जस ्= क1त 7-1-22 – At this stage, a गुणः replacement is

ordained for the

कारः of क1त by 7-3-109

105) 1-1-62 न लुमताEग�य 1-1-63

व�ृ": लुमता श}देन लु`े ति�नLम"मEगकाय� न �यात ्। When an affix takes the लुक्, /ु or लुप ्elision,

the operations that were ordained on the अEगम ्by the affix, shall not be carried out.

Continuing from above example: क1त + जस ्= क1त 7-1-22 – The गुणः replacement is stopped

because of 1-1-63

106) 7-1-53 ��ेयः

27

व�ृ": ^�-श}द�य �यादेशः �यादाLम । The term ‘^�’ gets ‘�य’ as the replacement, when followed by

the affix ‘आम’्।

उदाहरणम ्– ^� + आम ्= �य + आम ्7-1-53 = �य नाम ्7-1-54 = �या नाम ्6-4-3 = �याणाम ्8-4-2

August 14, 2010

107) 7-1-94 ऋदशुन�पुSदंसोऽनेहसां च

व�ृ": ऋद�तानाम ्उशनसादIनां चानँE �यादस|बFुौ सौ । ‘ऋत’् (short ‘ऋ’) ending terms, as well as the

terms ‘उशनस’्, ‘पSुदंसस’् and ‘अनेहस’् get the ‘अनँE’ replacement when the ‘सँु’ suffix, that is not

स|ब�ुFः, follows.


धात ृ+ सँु = धातन ्+ स ्7-1-94, 1-1-53, 1-3-2. Example continued in the following sutras.

108) 6-4-11 अप-्तनृ-्तचृ-्�वस-ृन`-ृने4ृ-Yव4ृ-M"-ृहोत-ृपोत-ृ]शा�तॄणाम ्

व�ृ": अबादIनामुपधाया दIघ\ऽस|बFुौ सव�नाम�थाने । When a सव�नाम�थानम ्affix that is not a स|बु�Fः

follows, the penultimate vowel of ‘अप’्, of words ending in affixes ‘तनृ’् and ‘तचृ’् and of the words

‘�वस’ृ, ‘न`’ृ, ‘ने4ृ’, ‘Yव4ृ’, ‘M"’ृ, ‘होत’ृ, ‘पोत’ृ and ‘]शा�त’ृ is elongated.

गीतासु उदाहरणम ्– /ोकः Bg9-17 – Continued

धातन ्+ स ्= धातान ्+ स ्6-4-11 = धातान ्6-1-68 = धाता 8-2-7

109) 7-3-110 ऋतो �ङ-सव�नाम�थानयोः

व�ृ": ऋतोऽEग�य गुणो ङौ सव�नाम�थाने च । The ending letter ‘ऋ’ of a अEगम ् gets a गुणः

replacement, when followed by the affix ‘�ङ’ (स`मी-एकवचनम)् or an affix with the designation

सव�नाम�थानम।्


कतृ� + अम ्In place of the ending ‘ऋ’ of ‘कतृ�’ we have to substitute a गुण: letter (‘अ’, ‘ए’ or ‘ओ’ –

ref: 1-1-2 अदेE गुणः।) Before deciding which is the closest substitute, we have to consider the

following rule.

110) 1-1-51 उरण ्रपरः

व�ृ": ऋवण��थाने योऽण ्स रपरः स�नेव ]वत�ते । In the place of ऋवण�: if an अण ्letter (‘अ/आ’, ‘इ/ई’,

‘उ/ऊ’) comes as a substitute, it is always followed by a ‘रँ’ (‘र’्, ‘ल’्) letter.

28

गीतासु उदाहरणम ्– /ोकः Bg14-19 – continued

कतृ� + अम ्– using the present rule the three choices for the substitute become ‘अर’्, ‘ए’ and ‘ओ’।

Considering the place of pronunciation we know that the closest substitute for ‘ऋ’ is ‘अर’्।

कतृ� + अम ्= कत�र ्+ अम ्7-3-110, 1-1-51 = कता�रम ्6-4-11

111) 6-1-111 ऋत उत ्

व�ृ": ऋतो ङLसँ-ङसोर1त उe एकादेशः । The उकारः is a single substitute for a ऋकारः and the

following अकारः of the affix ‘ङLसँ’ or ‘ङस’्।

उदाहरणम ्– Example under next rule.

112) 8-2-24 रात ्स�य

व�ृ": रेफात ्संयोगा�त�य स�यवै लोपो ना�य�य । Following the letter ‘र’् ( रेफः), the elision (लोपः)

ordained for the last member of a conjunct (संयोगः), happens only for the letter ‘स’्।

उदाहरणम ्– धात ृ+ ङLसँ = धात ्ऋ + अ स ्1-3-2, 1-3-8 = धातुस ्� 6-1-111, 1-1-51 = धातुर ्8-2-24 =

धातःु 8-3-15

113) (under 8-4-1) वा�"�कम ्– ऋवणा��न�य णYवं वाrयम ्

णकारः is prescribed in the place of the नकारः after the vowel ‘ऋ’ also (along-side the रेफः and

षकारः)।

उदाहरणम ्– धात ृ+ आम ्= धात ृ+ नाम ्7-1-54 = धातॄ + नाम ्6-4-3 = धातॄणाम ्

114) 6-4-6 न ृच

व�ृ": अ�य नाLम वा दIघ�ः । The ऋकारः of the word न ृis elongated optionally when followed by

the affix नाम.्

उदाहरणम ्– न ृ+ आम ्= न ृ+ नाम ्7-1-54 = नॄ + नाम ्or न ृ+ नाम ्6-4-6 = नॄणाम ्or नणृाम ्(By

वा�"�कम)्

August 28, 2010

115) 7-1-90 गोतो 6णत ्

व�ृ": ओकाराe �व(हतं सव�नाम�थानं 6णaत ् । The सव�नाम�थानम ्affixes following the letter ‘ओ’

behave as if they have the letter ‘ण’् as an indicatory letter.

उदाहरणम ्– गो + सँु = गौ + स ्7-1-90, 7-2-115 = गौः 8-2-66, 8-3-15

29

116) 6-1-93 औतोऽ|शसोः

व�ृ": ओतोऽ|शसोर�च आकार एकादेशः । The letter ‘आ’ is the single substitute in the place of the

letter ‘ओ’ and the following vowel (the letter ‘अ’) belonging to the affix ‘अम’् or ‘शस’्।


6-1-93 गो + अम ्= गाम ्

117) 7-1-18 औङ आपः

व�ृ": आब�तादEगात ्पर�य औङः शी �यात ्। The affixes ‘औ’ and ‘औt’ get ‘शी’ as a substitute when

they follow a base ending in an ‘आप’् affix.

उदाहरणम ्– Example under next rule.

118) 6-1-105 दIघा��जLस च

व�ृ": दIघा��जLस इ�च च परे न पूव�सवण�दIघ�ः । The पूव�सवण�दIघ�ः substitute (ordained by ]थमयोः

पूव�सवण�ः 6-1-102) shall not take place when the जस ्affix or an इच ्letter follow a long vowel.

उदाहरणम ्– रमा + औ = रमा + शी 7-1-18 = रमा + ई 1-3-8 = रमे 6-1-87, because पूव�सवण�दIघ�ः is

stopped by 6-1-105

119) 7-3-106 स|बFुौ च

व�ृ": आप एकारः �यात ्स|बुFौ । A अEगम ्(base) ending in the feminine affix ‘आप’् takes the letter

‘ए’ as a substitute when followed by a स|ब�ुFः affix.

उदाहरणम ्– रमा + सँु = रमे + स ्7-3-106, 1-3-2 = रमे 6-1-69

120) 7-3-105 आ�ङ चापः

व�ृ": आ�ङ ओLस चाप एकारः । ‘आप’् ending bases get एकारः as the substitute when followed by

the affix ‘आE’ (‘टा’) or ‘ओस’्।

उदाहरणम ्– रमा + टा = रमे + आ 7-3-105, 1-3-7 = रमया 6-1-78

रमा + ओस ्= रमे + ओस ्7-3-105 = रमयोस ्6-1-78 = रमयो: 8-2-66, 8-3-15

121) 7-3-113 याडापः

व�ृ": आपो �ङतो याt । The �ङत ्affixes following a base ending in an ‘आप’् affix get the augment

‘याt’।

उदाहरणम ्– रमा + ङे = रमा + या ए 1-3-8, 7-3-113, 1-1-46 = रमाय ै6-1-88

रमा + ङLसँ = रमा + अस ्1-3-2, 1-3-8 = रमा + या अस ्7-3-113, 1-1-46 = रमायास ्6-1-101 =

रमाया: 8-2-66, 8-3-15

30

रमा + ङस ् = रमा + अस ्1-3-8, 1-3-4 = रमा + या अस ्7-3-113, 1-1-46 = रमायास ्6-1-101 =

रमाया: 8-2-66, 8-3-15

122) 7-3-116 ङेरा|नuा|नीkयः

व�ृ": नu�ताe, आब�ताe, ’नी’श}दाrच पर�य ङेराम ्। The affix ‘�ङ’, following a base ending in ‘नदI’ or

‘आप’् or following the term ‘नी’, gets ‘आम’् as the substitute.

उदाहरणम ्– रमा + �ङ = रमा + आम ्7-3-116 = रमा + या आम ्7-3-113, 1-1-46 = रमायाम ्6-1-101

September 11, 2010 (�ीगणेश-चतथु�)

123) 7-3-114 सव�ना|नः �या�~�वT

व�ृ": आब�तात ्सव�ना|नो �ङतः �याt �याe, आपT s�वः। The ‘�ङत’् affixes that follow a सव�नाम-श}द:

that ends in an ‘आप’् affix, get the ‘�याt’ augment and the (अEगम ्ending in) ‘आप’् is shortened.

उदाहरणम ्– सवा� + ङे = सव� + �या ए 1-3-8, 7-3-114, 1-1-46 = सव��य ै6-1-88

सवा� + ङLसँ = सव� + �या अस ्1-3-8, 1-3-2, 7-3-114, 1-1-46 = सव��याः 6-1-101, 8-2-66, 8-3-15

सवा� + ङस ्= सव� + �या अस ्1-3-8, 7-3-114, 1-1-46 = सव��याः 6-1-101, 8-2-66, 8-3-15

सवा� + �ङ = सवा� + आम ्7-3-116 = सव��याम ्7-3-114, 1-1-46, 6-1-101

124) 1-4-6 �ङ1त s�वT

व�ृ": इयँङुवEँ�थानौ �ीश}दLभ�नौ 1नYय�ीLलEगावीदतूौ s�वौ च इवण\वण� ि�या ं वा नदIसCDौ �तो

�ङ1त । The vowels long ‘ई’ and long ‘ऊ’ that are always feminine and which can take ‘इयEँ’ and

‘उवEँ’ replacements, except for the word ‘�ी’, and the short ‘इ’ and short ‘उ’ ending words in

feminine, get the ‘नदI’ designation optionally when followed by a ‘�ङत’् affix.

उदाहरणम ्– म1त + ङे – म1त-श}दः gets नदI सCDा optionally by 1-4-6 . Example continued under

next sutram.

125) 7-3-112 आnनuाः

व�ृ": नu�तात ्परेषां �ङतामाडागमः । The ‘�ङत’् affixes that follow an अEगम ्ending in a term having

the नदI-सCDा, get the ‘आt’ augment.

उदाहरणम ्– म1त + ङे = म1त आ ए 1-3-8, 1-4-6, 7-3-112, 1-1-46. Example continued under the

next rule.

126) 6-1-90 आटT

व�ृ": आटोऽ�च परे व�ृFरेकादेशः । व�ृFः letter is a single replacement when ‘आt’ is followed by a

vowel.

उदाहरणम ्–

31

When नदI-सCDा is taken:

म1त + ङे = म1त आ ए 1-3-8, 1-4-6, 7-3-112, 1-1-46 = म1त ऐ 6-1-90 = मYय ै6-1-77

म1त + ङLसँ = म1त आ अस ्1-3-8, 1-3-2, 1-4-6, 7-3-112, 1-1-46 = म1त आस ्6-1-90 = मYयाः 6-1-

77, 8-2-66, 8-3-15

म1त + ङस ्= म1त आ अस ्1-3-8, 1-4-6, 7-3-112, 1-1-46 = म1त आस ्6-1-90 = मYयाः 6-1-77, 8-2-

66, 8-3-15

When नदI-सCDा is not taken:

म1त + ङे = मते + ए 1-3-8, 1-4-7, 7-3-111 = मतये 6-1-78

म1त + ङLसँ = मते + अस ्1-3-8, 1-3-2, 1-4-7, 7-3-111 = मतेः 6-1-110, 8-2-66, 8-3-15

म1त + ङस ्= मते + अस ्1-3-8, 1-4-7, 7-3-111 = मतेः 6-1-110, 8-2-66, 8-3-15

127) 7-3-117 इदeुkयाम ्

व�ृ": इदeुkयां नदIसCDकाkयां पर�य ङेराम ्। The affix ‘�ङ’, following a term having the नदI-सCDा

and ending in short ‘इ’ or short ‘उ’, gets ‘आम’् as its replacement.


When नदI-सCDा is taken:

म1त + �ङ = म1त + आम ्1-4-6, 7-3-117 = म1त + आ आम,् 7-3-112, 1-1-46 = म1त आम ्6-1-90 =

मYयाम ्6-1-77

When नदI-सCDा is not taken:

म1त + �ङ = मत + औ 1-4-7, 7-3-119 = मतौ 6-1-88

128) 7-2-99 ^�चतुरोः ि�या ं1तस-ृचतस ृ

व�ृ": �ीLलEगयोरेतयोरेतौ �तो �वभ�ौ। When a �वभ��ः affix follows, ‘^�’ and ‘चतुर’् get the

replacements ‘1तस’ृ and ‘चतस’ृ respectively, in the feminine gender.

उदाहरणम ्under next rule.

129) 7-2-100 अ�च र ऋतः

व�ृ": 1तस-ृचतस ृएतयोऋ� कार�य रेफादेशः �याद�च । The ऋकारः of ‘1तस’ृ and ‘चतस’ृ gets रेफः as the

replacement, when followed by a vowel.

उदाहरणम ्– ^� + जस ्= ^� + अस ्1-3-7 = 1तस ृ+ अस ्7-2-99 = 1त�ः 7-2-100, 8-2-66, 8-3-15

32

^� + शस ्= ^� + अस ्1-3-8 = 1तस ृ+ अस ्7-2-99 = 1त�ः 7-2-100, 8-2-66, 8-3-15

September 25, 2010

130) (वा�"�कम)् नुँम-्अ�चर-त�ृव�ावेkयो नुँt पूव��व]1तषेधेन

When there is a �व]1तषेधः between the ‘नुँt’ augment and one of the following – ‘नुँम’् augment,

रेफ: replacement for ऋकारः when a vowel follows, or the त�ृव�ावः, the ‘नुँt’ augment takes

precedence.

उदाहरणम ्–^� + आम ्= 1तस ृ+ आम ्7-2-99 = 1तस ृ+ नाम ्The रेफादेशः for ऋकारः is stopped by

this वा�"�कम ्and precedence is given to नुँt, which comes in by 7-1-54. Example continued under

next rule.

131) 6-4-4 न 1तसचृतस ृ

व�ृ": एतयोना�Lम दIघ\ न । The elongation of a vowel, ordained when the affix ‘नाम’् follows, does

not happen in the case of ‘1तस’ृ and ‘चतस’ृ।

उदाहरणम ्– ^� + आम ्= 1तस ृ+ आम ्7-2-99 = 1तस ृ+ नाम ्7-1-54 = 1तसणृाम ्6-4-4, णYवम ्by

वा�"�कम ्under 8-4-1.

132) 1-4-3 यू �या>यौ नदI

व�ृ": ईकारा�तमूकारा�तं च �या>यं श}दOपं नदIसंDं भव1त । A term ending in long ‘ई’ or long ‘ऊ’

gets the सCDा ‘नदI’ if it is used exclusively in the feminine gender.

उदाहरणम ्

गौरI + ङे (गौरI has the designation नदI which allows us to apply 7-3-112) = गौरI + आ ए 1-3-

8, 7-3-112, 1-1-46 = गौरI + ऐ 6-1-90 = गौय� 6-1-77

133) 7-3-107 अ|बाथ�नuोs��व:

व�ृ": अ|बाथा�नामEगानां नu�तानां च s�वो भव1त स|बFुौ परत: । An अEगम ्that has the meaning of

अ|बा (mother) or ends in a term having the नदI-सCDा, gets substituted by a short vowel if स|बु�F:

(vocative singular affix) follows.


हे अ|बा/अ�का/अ[ला + सँु (स|ब�ुF:) = हे अ|ब/अ�क/अ[ल + सँु = हे अ|ब/अ�क/अ[ल 1-3-2, 6-1-69

हे गौरI + सँु (स|बु�F:) = हे गौjर + सँु = हे गौjर 1-3-2, 6-1-69

134) 6-4-79 ि�याि�याि�याि�या::::

33

व�ृ": अ�येयE �यादजादौ ]Yयये परे । There is a substitution of ‘इयँE’ in place of the term ‘�ी’ when

followed by an affix beginning with a vowel.


�ी + जस ्= �ी + अस ्1-3-7, 1-3-9, 1-3-4 = � ्इयँE + अस ्6-4-79, 1-1-53 = ि�य ्+ अस ्1-3-2, 1-

3-3, 1-3-9 = ि�य:8-2-66, 8-3-15

135) 6-4-80 वाऽ|शसो:

व�ृ": अLम शLस च ि�या इयE वा �यात ्। There is an optional substitution of ‘इयEँ’ in place of the

term ‘�ी’ when followed by the ]Yयय: ‘अम’् or ‘शस’्।


�ी + शस ्4-1-2 = �ी + अस ्1-3-8, 1-3-9, 1-3-4 = � ्इयEँ + अस ्6-4-79, 1-1-53 = ि�य ्+ अस ्1-3-

2, 1-3-3, 1-3-9 = ि�य: 8-2-66, 8-3-15

OR

�ी + शस ्= �ी + अस ्1-3-8, 1-3-9, 1-3-4 = �ीस ्6-1-102 = �ी: 8-2-66, 8-3-15

�ी + अम ्= �ी + अम ्1-3-4 = � ्इयEँ + अम ्6-4-79, 1-1-53 = ि�य ्+ अम ्1-3-2, 1-3-3, 1-3-9 =

ि�यम ्

OR

�ी + अम ्= �ी + अम ्1-3-4 = �ीम ्6-1-107

October 9, 2010

136) 6-4-77 अ�च �ुधातु�ुवां �वोjरयङुँवङँौ

व�ृ": �ु]Yयया�त�य, इवण\वणा��त�य धातो:, �ू इYय�य च, अEग�य इयँङुवङँौ �तोऽजादौ ]Yयये परे। If a

]Yयय: beginning with an अच ्(vowel) follows, then the (ending letter of the) अEगम ्is replaced by

इयEँ/उवEँ in the following three cases – (1) If the अEगम ्ends in the ]Yयय: ‘�ु’ or (2) If the अEगम ्

ends in the इवण�: or उवण�: of a धातु: or (3) If the अEगम ्is the word ‘�ू’

उदाहरणम ्– गाय�ी-म��:

धी + शस ्= धी + अस ्1-3-8, 1-3-4 = �धय: 6-4-77

34

�ी + औ = ��यौ 6-4-77

�ू + ओस ्= �ू + ओस ्1-3-4 = �ुवो: 6-4-77 – गीता 8.10

137) 6-4-82 एरनेकाचोऽसंयोगपूव��य

व�ृ": धाYववयवसंयोगपूव\ न भव1त य इवण��तद�तो यो धात�ुतद�त�यानेकाचोऽEग�य यणजादौ ]Yयये। If

a ]Yयय: beginning with an अच ्(vowel) follows, then the (ending letter of the) अEगम ्is replaced

by a यण ्letter in the following situation – If the अEगम ्is अनेकाच ्(has more than one vowel) and

ends in a धातु: which ends in the इवण�: (इकारः or ईकारः) and there is no conjunct consonant

belonging to the धातु: prior to the इवण�:।

उदाहरणम ्– गीतासु उदाहरणम ्– /ोकः 10.24

सेनानी + आम ्= सेना�याम ्

138) 1-4-4 नेयङुँवEँ�थानाव�ी

व�ृ": इयङुँवङँोः ि�थ1तय�यो�तावीदतूौ नदIसंDौ न �तो न तु �ी। The vowels long ई and long ऊ which

get the इयEँ and उवEँ replacements (respectively), do not take the नदI designation. But the word

�ी takes the designation.

उदाहरणम ्– हे �ी + सँु = No s�वादेशः by 7-3-107 because 1-4-4 stops the नदI designation = हे

�ीः (SँYव-�वसग�)

हे �ू + सँु = No s�वादेशः by 7-3-107 because 1-4-4 stops the नदI designation = हे �ूः (SँYव-

�वसग�)

139) 1-4-5 वाऽऽLम

व�ृ": इयङुँवEँ�थानौ �या>यौ य ूआLम वा नदIसंDौ �तो न त ु�ी। The vowels long ई and long ऊ

that are always feminine and which get the इयँE and उवEँ replacements (respectively), get the

नदI designation optionally when followed by the आम ्affix. But this rule is not applicable to the

word �ी.

उदाहरणम ्– �ी + आम,् �ू + आम ्= get नदI designation optionally.

When नदI designation is taken:

�ी + आम ्= �ी + नाम ्7-1-54, 1-3-2, 1-3-3, 1-1-46 = �ीणाम ्8-4-2

�ू + आम ्= �ू + नाम ्7-1-54, 1-3-2, 1-3-3, 1-1-46 = �ूणाम ्8-4-2

When नदI designation in not taken:

35

�ी + आम ्= ��यEँ + आम ्6-4-77 = ��याम ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

�ू + आम ्= �ुवEँ + आम ्6-4-77 = �ुवाम ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

140) 4-1-4 अजाuत4ाप ्

व�ृ": अजा(दkयः ]ा1तप(दकेkयः अकारा�ताच ् च ]ा1तप(दकात ् ि�यां टाप ् ]Yययो भव1त। The

]ा1तप(दका1न ‘अज’ etc. and ]ा1तप(दका1न ending in अकारः get the टाप ्affix in the feminine gender.

उदाहरणम ्– ‘अज’ in feminine = अज + टाप ्4-1-4 = अजा 1-3-7, 1-3-3, 6-1-101 = Then it takes the

सँुप ्affixes by 4-1-2

‘सव�’ in feminine = सव� + टाप ्4-1-4 = सवा� 1-3-7, 1-3-3, 6-1-101 = Then it takes the सँुप ्affixes

by 4-1-2

141) 4-1-5 ऋ�नेkयो ङIप ्

व�ृ": ऋकारा�तेkयो नकारा�तेkयT ]ा1तप(दकेkयः ि�यां ङIप ् ]Yययो भव1त। The ]ा1तप(दका1न that

end in a ऋकारः or नकारः get the ङIप ्affix in the feminine gender.

उदाहरणम ्– कतृ� in feminine = कतृ� + ङIप ्4-1-5 = क�� 1-3-8, 1-3-3, 6-1-77 = Then it takes the सँुप ्

affixes by 4-1-2

142) 4-1-10 न षt�व�ा(दkयः

व�ृ": षtसंDकेkयः �व�ा(दkयT ]ा1तप(दकेkयः �ी]Yययो न भव1त। ‘�वसा 1त�Tत�T नना�दा द(ुहता

तथा।याता माते1त स`तेै �व�ादय उदा�ताः॥’ The feminine affixes do not come after words that have

the षt designation and �वस ृetc.

उदाहरणम ्– �वस ृ= No ङIप ्because of 4-1-10

�वस ृ+ शस ्= �वस ृ+ अस ्1-3-8 = �वसॄः 6-1-102, SँYव-�वसग�

October 23, 2010

143) 7-1-24 अतोऽम ्

व�ृ": अतोऽEगात ्�लIबात ्�वमोरम।् The affixes ‘सँु’ and ‘अम’् that follow a neuter अEगम ्ending in

the short vowel ‘अ’ take ‘अम’् as their replacement.

गीतासु उदाहरणम ्– /ोकः 10.38

Dान + सँु 4-1-2 = Dान + अम ्7-1-24 = Dानम ्6-1-107

/ोकः 9.1

Dान + अम ्4-1-2 = Dान + अम ्7-1-24 = Dानम ्6-1-107

144) 6-1-85 अ�ता(दवrच

36

व�ृ": एकः पूव�परयोjर1त योऽयमेकादेशः स पूव��या�तवYपर�या(दवत।् When a single substitute comes

(using 6-1-84) in place of the preceding and the following element, then that single substitute is

treated as final (अ�त:) of what precedes as well as initial (आ(द:) of what follows.

उदाहरणम ्-

हे Dान + सँु (स|ब�ुF:) = हे Dान + अम ्7-1-24 = हे Dान ्अ म ्6-1-107

By this rule 6-1-85, the single substitute ‘अ’ will be considered as the final of the term ‘Dान’. This

now allows us to use 6-1-69 and we get the final form हे Dान

145) 7-1-19 नपुंसकाrच

व�ृ": �लIबाe औङः शी �यात।् The affixes ‘औ’ and ‘औt’ take ‘शी’ as their replacement when

following a neuter अEगम।्


Dान + औ = Dान + शी 7-1-19. Example continued in the rules below.

146) 1-4-18 य�च भम ्

व�ृ": यकारा(दष ुअजा(दषु च कX]Yययाव�धष ु�वा(द�वसव�नाम�थानेष ुपवू� भसCDं �यात।् Excluding the

affixes that are सव�नाम�थानम,् when any of the other affixes from ‘सँु’ up to ‘कप’् that begin with

यकारः or अच ्(vowel) follow, the base gets the भ-सCDा. Note: From ‘सँु’ up to ‘कप’् means any

]Yयय: prescribed from 4-1-2 up to the end of the 5th Chapter of the अ4ा_यायी।


Dान + औ = Dान + शी 7-1-19 = Dान + ई 1-3-8 Here Dान gets the भ-सCDा by 1-4-18

147) 6-4-148 य�ये1त च

व�ृ": ईकारे त�Fते च परे भ�येवणा�वण�योल\पः। When a ईकारः or a त�Fत-]Yयय: follows, the (ending)

इ-वण�: (इकारः or ईकारः) or the (ending) अवण�: (अकारः or आकारः) of the अEगम ्with the भ-सCDा

takes लोपः।


Dान + औ = Dान + शी 7-1-19 = Dान + ई 1-3-8 – Here the ending letter ‘अ’ of the अEगम ्should

take लोपः by 6-4-148, 1-1-52. Example continued below.

148) (under 6-4-148) वा�"�कम ्– औङः pयां ]1तषेधो वाrयः

6-4-148 य�ये1त च does not apply when the अEगम ्is followed by the term ‘शी’ that has come as

an आदेश: in place of the affix ‘औ’ or ‘औt’।


37

Dान + औ = Dान + शी 7-1-19 = Dान + ई 1-3-8 = Dाने 6-1-87 – The अकार-लोपः that was to

happen by 6-4-148 is stopped by this वा�"�कम।्

149) 7-1-20 जpशसोः Lशः

व�ृ": �लIबाe अनयोः Lशः �यात।् The affixes ‘जस’् and ‘शस’् get ‘Lश’ as the replacement when they

follow a neuter अEगम।्


धन + शस ्= धन + Lश 7-1-20, 1-1-55. Example continued under sutras below.

150) 1-1-42 Lश सव�नाम�थानम ्

व�ृ": ‘Lश’ इYयेतe उ�सCDं �यात।् The affix Lश gets the designation सव�नाम�थानम.्


धन + शस ्= धन + Lश 7-1-20, 1-1-55 – Here Lश has the सव�नाम�थान-संDा

151) 7-1-72 नपुंसक�य झलचः

व�ृ": झल�त�याज�त�य च �लIब�य नुँम ्�यात ्सव�नाम�थाने। When a सव�नाम�थानम ्affix follows,

the neuter bases that end in a झल ्letter or an अच ्(vowel) get the नुँम ्augment.


धन + शस ्= धन + Lश 7-1-20, 1-1-55 – नुँम ्augment is to be added (as shown below) to धन

by 7-1-72.

152) 1-1-47 Lमदचोऽ�Yयात ्परः

व�ृ": अचां म_ये योऽ�Yयः, त�माYपर�त�यैवा�तावयवो Lमत ्�यात।् An augment with मकारः as the इत ्

letter attaches itself after last vowel of the term to which it is prescribed.


धन + शस ्= धन + Lश 7-1-20, 1-1-55 = धननुँम ्+ Lश 7-1-72, 1-1-47 = धनन ्+ इ 1-3-2, 1-3-3, 1-

3-8 = धना1न 6-4-8

153) 7-1-25 अe� डतरा(दkयः पCचkयः

व�ृ": एkयः �लIबेkयः �वमोरe� आदेशः �यात।् The affixes सँु and अम,् get अe� as their

replacement, when following the five pronouns (listed in 1-1-27) beginning with डतर when used

in the neuter.


38

कतर + सँु = कतर + अe� 7-1-25 – Example continued under sutras below.

154) 1-1-64 अचोऽ�Yया(द (ट

व�ृ": अचां म_ये योऽ�Yयः स आ(दय��य त(�सCDं �यात।् That part of a group of sounds which

begins with the last vowel of the group (and goes to the end of the group) gets the designation

‘(ट’।


कतर + सँु = कतर + अe� 7-1-25 – Here the vowel अ after the रेफः in कतर gets the designation

(ट.

155) 6-4-143 टेः

व�ृ": �ड1त भ�य टेल\पः। When the अEगम ्has the भ-सCDा, then its (ट portion takes लोप: when

followed by an affix that has डकारः as an indicatory letter.


कतर + सँु = कतर + अe� 7-1-25 = कतर ्अe 1-3-3, 6-4-143 = कतरe 8-2-39 = कतरe, कतरत ्8-4-56

November 13, 2010

156) 7-1-23 �वमोन�पुंसकात ्

व�ृ": लुक् �यात।् The affixes ‘सँु’ and ‘अम’् that follow a neuter अEगम ्take the लुक् elision.

उदाहरणम ्– वाjर + सँु = वाjर 7-1-23

वाjर + अम ्= वाjर 7-1-23

157) 7-1-73 इकोऽ�च �वभ�ौ

व�ृ": इग�त�य �लIब�य नुँम ्अ�च �वभ�ौ। When a case affix that begins with a vowel follows, the

इक् (‘इ’, ‘उ’, ‘ऋ’, ‘ऌ’) ending neuter bases get the नुँम ्augment.

उदाहरणम ्– वाjर + औ = वाjर + शी 7-1-19 = वाjरनुँम ्+ ई 7-1-73, 1-1-47, 1-3-8 = वाjरणी 1-3-2, 1-

3-3, 8-4-2

158) न लुमताEग�य इYय�याऽ1नYयYवात ्पMे समब�ुF1नLम"ो गुणः – this is inferred based on the

inclusion of the term ‘अ�च’ in 7-1-73.

उदाहरणम ्– हे वाjर + सँु – सँु gets स|बु�F-सCDा by 2-3-49 = हे वाjर 7-1-23 . At this stage by 7-3-

108 there could have been a गुणादेश: in place of the ending letter ‘इ’, but this अEगकाय�म ्is

stopped by 1-1-63 न लुमताEग�य।

39

But the सू�म ्1-1-63 न लुमताEग�य is not always followed in the language so we get an alternate

form where the गुणादेश: does take place -

हे वाjर + सँु – सँु gets स|बु�F-सCDा by 2-3-49 = हे वारे 7-1-23, 7-3-108 – Due to अ1नYयYवम ्of 1-

1-63 न लुमताEग�य, the अEगकाय�म ्is not stopped.

159) (in महाभा�यम ्on 7-1-96) वा�"�कम ्– वeृ_यौYवत�ृव�ावगुणेkयो नुँम ्पूव��व]1तषेधेन

When there is a �व]1तषेधः of the नुँम ्augment with a व�ृFः, औYवम,् त�ृव�ावः or गुणः, the नुँम ्

augment comes by पूव��व]1तषेधः (in spite of it being an earlier rule in the अ4ा_यायी).

उदाहरणम ्– वाjर + ङे = वाjर + ए 1-3-8 = वाjरनुँम ्+ ए 7-1-73 – (The गुणः prescribed by 7-3-

111 घे�ङ�1त is stopped by this वा�"�कम)् = वाjरणे 1-3-2, 1-3-3, 8-4-2

160) 7-1-75 अि�थद�धस� य¡णामनङुदा"ः

व�ृ": एषामनE �याt टादाव�च (स चोदा"ः)। When a case affix – starting from the instrumental

singular affix ‘टा’ – beginning with a vowel (अच)्, follows, the bases ‘अि�थ’, ‘द�ध’, ‘सि�थ’ and ‘अ¢M’

get the अनँE replacement, which has the उदा"ः accent.

उदाहरणम ् – द�ध + टा = दधन ् + आ 7-1-75, 1-1-53, 1-3-2, 1-3-3, 1-3-7 – Example continued

under the next rule.

161) 6-4-134 अ[लोपोऽनः

व�ृ"व�ृ"व�ृ"व�ृ":::: अEगावयवोऽसव�नाम�थान-यजा(द-�वा(दपरो योऽन,् त�याकार�य लोपः। There is an elision of the

letter ‘अ’ of ‘अन’् when

i) the ‘अन’् belongs to a अEगम ्and

ii) the ‘अन’् is (immediately) followed by a �वा(द-]Yयय: which is not सव�नाम�थानम ्and which

either begins with the letter ‘य’् or a vowel (अच)्।

उदाहरणम ्continued – दधन ्+ आ = द_ना 6-4-134

162) 6-4-136 �वभाषा �ङpयोः

व�ृ"व�ृ"व�ृ"व�ृ":::: अEगावयवोऽसव�नाम�थान-यजा(द-�वा(दपरो योऽन,् त�याकार�य लोपो वा �याe �ङpयोः परयोः।

The अकार-लोपः prescribed by 6-4-134 अ[लोपोऽनः takes place only optionally when the ]Yयय:

that is following the ‘अन’् (of the अEगम)् is ‘�ङ’ or ‘शी’।

उदाहरणम ्– द�ध + �ङ 4-1-2 = द�ध + इ 1-3-8, 1-3-9 = दधन ्+ इ 7-1-75 = दि_न, दध1न 6-4-136

163) 7-1-74 ततृीया(दषु भा�षतपु�ंकं पुंवe गालव�य

व�ृ": ]व�ृ"1नLम"�ैये भा�षतपु�ंकम ् इग�त ं �लIबं पुंवaा टादाव�च। From the instrumental singular

onwards, neuter adjectives ending in an इक् (‘इ’, ‘उ’, ‘ऋ’, ‘ऌ’) letter optionally take the same form

as the masculine, when an अजा(द-]Yयय: (vowel-beginning affix) follows.

उदाहरणम ्– Without पुंव�ावः – धात ृ+ टा = धात ृ+ आ 1-3-7 = धातणृा 7-1-73, 8-4-2

40

In the case of पुंव�ावः – धात ृ+ टा = धात ृ+ आ 1-3-7 = धा�ा 6-1-77

November 27, 2010

164) 8-2-31 हो ढः

व�ृ": ह�य ढः �या�झLल पदा�ते च। A हकारः gets ढकारः as replacement when followed by a झल ्

letter or at the end of a पदम.्

उदाहरणम ्– Lलc + सँु 4-1-2 = Lलc + स ्1-3-2 = Lलc 6-1-68 – Example continued below.

165) 1-4-14 सु1`ङ�त ं पदम ्

व�ृ": सुब�तं 1तङ�तं च पदसंDं �यात।् A term ending in a सँुप-्]Yयय: (listed in 4-1-2) or a 1तE-]Yयय:

(listed in 3-4-78) gets the पद-सCDा .

Example continued:

Here Lलc gets पद-सCDा by 1-4-14, 1-1-62 and therefore we get Lल� 8-2-31 = Lल� 8-2-39 = Lलt,

Lल� 8-4-56

166) 1-4-17 �वा(द�वसव�नाम�थाने

व�ृ": कX]Yययाव�धष ु �वा(द�वसव�नाम�थानेषु पूव� पदं �यात।् Excluding the affixes that have the

सव�नाम�थान-सCDा, when any of the other affixes from सँु up to कप ्follow, the base gets the पद-

सCDा. Note: From सँु up to कप ्means any ]Yयय: prescribed from 4-1-2 up to the end of the 5th

Chapter of the अ4ा_यायी.

उदाहरणम ्– Lलc + kयाम ्4-1-2 Here the अEगम ्‘Lलc’ gets पद-सCDा by 1-4-17 and therefore we

get Lल� + kयाम ्8-2-31 = Lल�kयाम ्8-2-39

167) 8-3-29 डः Lस धुtँ

व�ृ": डात ्पर�य स�य धु�ँ वा। The letter ‘स’् following the letter ‘�’ gets the धुtँ augment optionally.

[Note: पjरभाषा - उभय1नदHशे पCचमी1नदHशो बलIयान ्। Here 'ड:' ends in the पCचमी �वभ��: (fifth

case) while 'Lस' ends in the स`मी �वभ��: (seventh case.) Since पCचमी has greater force, the

letter 'स'् takes the augment as per 1-1-67त�मा(दYय"ुर�य ।]

उदाहरणम ्– Lलc + सुप ्4-1-2 = Lल� + सु 1-3-3, 1-4-17, 8-2-31, 8-2-39 = Lल� + सु or Lल� + _सु 8-

3-29, 1-3-2, 1-3-3,1-1-46 – Example continued below.

168) 8-4-41 4ुना 4ुः

व�ृ": �तोः 4ुना योगे 4ुः �यात।् When the letter ‘स’् or a letter of the त-वग�: (‘त’्, ‘थ’्, ‘e’, ‘ध’्, ‘न’्)

comes in contact with either the letter ‘ष’् or a letter of the ट-वग�: (‘t’, ‘�’, ‘�’, ‘�’, ‘ण’्) then it is

replaced respectively by ‘ष’्, ट-वग�: (‘t’, ‘�’, ‘�’, ‘�’, ‘ण’्).

Example continued:

41

Lल� + सु or Lल� + _सु – Here the सकारः of सु in the first form and the धकारः in the second form

would respectively get the षकारः and ढकारः as replacements by 8-4-41. – Example continued

below.

169) 8-4-42 न पदा�ता�ोरनाम ्

व�ृ": पदा�तात ्टवगा�त ्पर�याऽनामः �तोः 4ुन� �यात।् The rule 8-4-41 4ुना 4ुः does not apply in the

case where there is a letter of the ट-वग�: (‘t’, ‘�’, ‘�’, ‘�’, ‘ण’्) that is at the end of a पदम,् followed

by the letter ‘स’् or a letter of the त-वग�: (‘त’्, ‘थ’्, ‘e’, ‘ध’्, ‘न’्)। This prohibition does not hold in the

case where the नकारः of ‘नाम’् follows a letter of the ट-वग�: (‘t’, ‘�’, ‘�’, ‘�’, ‘ण’्) that is at the end

of a पदम।्

Example continued:

Lल� + सु or Lल� + _सु – The replacements ordained by 8-4-41 are stopped by 8-4-42 because

the letter ‘�’ of ‘Lल�’ is at the end of a पदम ्

Lल� + सु = Lलtसु 8-4-55

Lल� + _सु = Lल� + Yसु 8-4-55 = LलtYसु 8-4-55

Examples continued below.

170) (on 8-4-48) वा�"�कम ्– चयो (aतीयाः शjर पौ�करसादेjर1त वाrयम ्

When followed by a शर ्(श,् ष, स)् letter, the चय ्letters (च,् t, त,् क्, प)् are optionally replaced by

the second letter of their group (l, �, थ,् ख,् फ्).

Examples continued:

Lलtसु / LलtYसु

As per 8-2-1 पूव��ाLसFम,् the replacements done by 8-4-55 are not seen by this वा�"�कम ्(on 8-4-

48). So even though the टकारः of the first form and तकारः of the second form would have been

liable to respectively get ठकारः and थकारः as optional replacements, they don’t happen on

account of 8-2-1. Hence the final forms remain as Lलtसु / LलtYसु

171) 8-2-32 दादेधा�तोघ�ः

व�ृ": झLल पदा�ते चोपदेशे दादेधा�तोह��य घः �यात।् The हकारः of a धातु: that begins with a दकारः in

the उपदेशः (धात-ुपाठ:), gets घकारः as its replacement when followed by a झल ्letter or at the end

of a पदम।् Note: This सू�म ्is a अपवाद: (exception) to 8-2-31 हो ढः।

गीतासु उदाहरणम ्– /ोकः 3-10

42

इ4कामदcु + सँु 4-1-2 = इ4कामदcु + स ्1-3-2 = इ4कामदcु 6-1-68. Now इ4कामदcु gets the पद-सCDा

by 1-4-14, 1-1-62 and hence 8-2-32 applies to give इ4कामदघु ्

Example continued below.

172) 8-2-37 एकाचो बशो भष ्झष�त�य �_वोः

व�ृ": धाYववयव�यकैाचो झष�त�य बशो भष ्�यात,् से _वे पदा�ते च। The part of a धातःु, which ends

in a झष ्letter and has only one vowel, gets its बश ्letter replaced by the corresponding भष ्letter

when followed by a सकारः, the term ‘_व’् or at the end of a पदम।्

Example continued:

इ4कामदघु ् = इ4कामधघु ्8-2-37 =इ4कामधुग,् इ4कामधुक् 8-2-39, 8-4-56 = इ4कामदcु + kयाम ्4-1-

2 =इ4कामदघु ्+ kयाम ्8-2-32 =इ4कामधघु ्+ kयाम ्8-2-37 =इ4कामधु�kयाम ्8-2-39

इ4कामदcु + सुप ्4-1-2 = इ4कामदघु ् + सु 1-3-3, 8-2-32 = इ4कामधुघ ् + सु 8-2-37 = इ4कामधुग ् +

सु 8-2-39 = इ4कामधुग ्ष ु8-3-59 = इ4कामधMु ु8-4-55

173) 7-1-98 चतुरनडुहोरामुदा"ः

व�ृ": ‘चतुर’् ‘अनडुc’ इYयेतयोः सव�नाम�थाने परत आमागमो भव1त, स चोदा"ः। When a सव�नाम�थानम ्

affix follows, ‘चतुर’् and ‘अनडुc’ get the ‘आम’् augment. (This ‘आम’् augment has a उदा"ः accent.)

उदाहरणम ्– अनडुc + सँु = अनडुआc + स ्1-3-2, 7-1-98, 1-3-3, 1-1-47 = अन�वाc + स ्6-1-77 –


चतुर ्+ जस ्= चतुआर ्+ अस ्1-3-7, 1-3-4, 7-1-98, 1-3-3, 1-1-47 = चYवारः 6-1-77, 8-2-66, 8-3-15

174) 7-1-82 सावनडुहः

व�ृ": सौ परतः अनडुहोऽEग�य नुँमागमो भव1त। When the affix सँु follows, अनडुc gets the नुँम ्

augment.

Example continued:

अन�वाc + स ् = अन�वा�c + स ्7-1-82, 1-1-47, 1-3-2, 1-3-3= अन�वा�c 6-1-68 – Example

continued below.

175) 8-2-23 संयोगो�त�य लोपः

व�ृ": संयोगा�त ंयYपदं त�य लोपः �यात।् लोपः is ordained to the पदम ् that ends in a conjunct

consonant. As per 1-1-52, only the ending letter of the पदम ्will take लोपः.

Example continued:

अन�वा�c = अन�वान ्8-2-23, 1-1-52

43

Note: a) After 8-2-23 applies, 8-2-7 doesn’t get a chance to apply (and remove the ending letter

‘न’्) because of 8-2-1. b) Also, 8-2-31 doesn’t get a chance to apply (and change the ending letter

‘c’ to ‘�’) because it has to wait for 8-2-23 (which is an earlier rule in the ^�पादI section.) After 8-

2-23 applies and the letter ‘c’ is lost then 8-2-31 cannot apply.

176) 7-1-99 अम ्स|बुFौ

व�ृ": चतुरनडुहोरम ् �याYस|बुFौ। When a स|बु�Fः affix follows, चतुर ् and अनडुc get the अम ्

augment.

उदाहरणम ्– अनडुc + सँु (स|ब�ुFः) = अनडुअc + स ्1-3-2, 7-1-99, 1-3-3, 1-1-47 = अन�वc + स ्6-1-

77 = अन�व�c + स7्-1-82 = अन�व�c 6-1-68 = अन�वन ्8-2-23, 1-1-52

177) 8-2-72 वसँु�ंसँु_वं�वनडुहां दः

व�ृ": सा�तव�व�त�य �ंसादेT दः �याYपदा�ते। At the end of a पदम,् a term ending in the ‘वसँु’ affix

that ends in the letter ‘स’्, as well as the terms ‘�ंसँु’, ‘_वंसँु’ and ‘अनडुc’ get the letter ‘e’ as a

replacement. As per 1-1-52, the letter ‘e’ replaces only the ending letter of these terms.

उदाहरणम ्– अनडुc + kयाम ्Here अनडुc gets the पद-सCDा by 1-4-17 and then by 8-2-72 we get

अनडुekयाम ्

178) 7-1-55 षtचतkुय�T

व�ृ": षtसंDकेkयTतःुश}दाrचो"र�यामो नुँडागमो भव1त। The ‘आम’् affix gets ‘नुँt’ as an augment

when following ‘चतुर’् or a term with the designation ‘षt’।

उदाहरणम ्– चतुर ्+ आम ्4-1-2 = चतुर ्+ नाम ्7-1-55 – Example continued below.

179) 8-4-1 रषाkया ंनो णः समानपदे

व�ृ": एकपद�थाkयां रेफषकाराkयां पर�य न�य णः �यात।् When a नकारः follows a रेफः or a षकारः in

a single पदम,् it gets णकारः as a replacement.

Example continued:

चतुर ्+ नाम ्= चतुर ्+ णाम ्8-4-1 – Example continued below.

180) 8-4-46 अचो रहाkयां aे

व�ृ": अचः पराkया ंरेफहकाराkयां पर�य यरो aे वा �तः। A यर ्letter that follows a रेफः or a हकारः,

which in turn follows a vowel, is optionally doubled.

Example continued:

चतुर ्+ णाम ्= चतुणा�म,् चतुnणा�म ्8-4-46

181) 8-3-16 रोः सु�प

44

व�ृ": रोरेव �वसग�ः सु�प। When सुप-्]Yयय: (स`मी-बहुवचनम)् follows, only ‘Sँ’ gets �वसग�ः as a

replacement, not any other रेफ:।

उदाहरणम ्– चतुर ्+ सुप ्4-1-2 = चतुर ्+ सु 1-3-3, the �वसगा�देशः that would have come from 8-3-

15 is stopped by 8-3-16, since the रेफः of चतुर ्is not ‘Sँ’। Hence we get चतुषु� 8-3-59. Here the

षकारः would be optionally duplicated by 8-4-46. Example continued below.

182) 8-4-49 शरोऽ�च

व�ृ": अ�च परे शरो न aे �तः। When a vowel follows, शर ्letters (श,् ष,् स)् do not double.

Example continued:

चतषुु� The optional duplication of the षकारः by 8-4-46 is stopped by 8-4-49 to give चतुषु� as the

only final form.

December 11, 2010

183) 7-2-103 wकमः कः

व�ृ": wकमः कः �याe �वभ�ौ। When a �वभ��ः affix follows, ‘wकम’् gets ‘क’ as its replacement.


wकम ्+ अम ्4-1-2 = क + अम ्7-2-103, 1-1-55 = क + अम ्1-3-4 = कम ्6-1-107

184) 7-2-108 इदमो मः

व�ृ": इदमो म�य मः �यात ्सौ परे। YयदाuYवापवादः। When the affix ‘सँु’ follows, the मकारः of ‘इदम’्

gets मकारः as its replacement. This rule is an exception to the rule 7-2-102 YयदादIनामः ।

Example under the next rule.

185) 7-2-111 इदोऽय ्पुLंस

व�ृ": इदम इदोऽय ्�यात ्सौ पुLंस। When the affix ‘सँु’ follows, the ‘इe’ part of ‘इदम’् gets the

replacement ‘अय’्, in the context of the masculine gender.


इदम ्+ सँु 4-1-2 = इदम ्+ स ्1-3-2, 1-3-9. Now 7-2-108 overrules 7-2-102 and the ending मकार:

of इदम ्stays as a मकार:। Then we get अयम ्+ स ्7-2-111 = अयम ्6-1-68

186) 7-2-109 दT

45

व�ृ": इदमो द�य मः �याe �वभ�ौ। The दकारः of ‘इदम’् gets मकारः as a replacement when a

�वभ��ः affix follows.


इदम ्+ शस ्4-1-2 = इदम ्+ अस ्1-3-8, 1-3-9, 1-3-4 = इद अ + अस ्7-2-102, 1-1-52 = इद + अस ्6-

1-97 = इम + अस ्7-2-109 = इमास ्6-1-102 = इमान ्6-1-103

187) 7-2-112 अनाXयकः

व�ृ": अककार�येदम इदोऽन ्आ�प �वभ�ौ। आ^ब1त ]Yयाहारः। The ‘इe’ part of ‘इदम’् that is without the

ककारः gets ‘अन’् as its replacement, when the �वभ��ः affixes of the आप-्]Yयाहारः follow. ‘आप’् is

the ]Yयाहारः made of the ‘सँुप’् affixes from ‘टा’ until ‘सुप’्।


इदम ्+ टा 4-1-2 = इद अ + टा 7-2-102, 1-1-52 = इद + टा 6-1-97 = इद + इन 7-1-12 = अन + इन 7-

2-112 = अनेन 6-1-87

188) 7-2-113 हLल लोपः

व�ृ": अककार�येदम इदो लोपः �यादा�प हलादौ। The ‘इe’ of ‘इदम’् that is without the ककारः takes

लोपः, when the �वभ��ः affixes of the आप-्]Yयाहारः, which begin with a consonant, follow. This

rule is an अपवाद: (exception) to the prior rule 7-2-112.

Only the दकारः of ‘इe’ would take लोपः by 1-1-52. But the following पjरभाषा takes effect:

नानथ�केऽलो�Yय�व�धरनkयास�वकारे।

This means that the rule 1-1-52 अलोऽ�Yय�य does not apply in the case of a term that is devoid of

meaning, except in the case which involves modification of an अkयास:।

In this example, the entire term ‘इदम’् has meaning but the ‘इe’ part doesn’t. So 1-1-52 will not

apply when it comes to operating on the ‘इe’ part. Therefore, the ‘इe’ part completely takes लोपः

by 7-2-113.


189) 1-1-21 आu�तवदेकि�मन ्

व�ृ": एकि�मन ्w:यमाण ंकाय�मादा�वव अ�त इव च �यात।् An operation should be performed on a

single letter as upon an initial letter or upon a final letter.


46

इदम ्+ Lभस ्4-1-2 = इद अ + Lभस ्7-2-102, 1-1-52 = इद + Lभस ्6-1-97 = अ + Lभस ्7-2-113. Here

the अEगम ्is a single letter (अकार:). Using 1-1-21 we could now apply 7-1-9 which requires the

अEगम ्to end in an अकार:।

At this point the next rules comes and stops 7-1-9.


190) 7-1-11 नेदमदसोरकोः

व�ृ": अककारयोjरदमदसोLभ�स ऐस ्न। ‘Lभस’् does not get ‘ऐस’् as a replacement, when it follows

‘इदम’् or ‘अदस’् , that is without a ककारः। This is a negation of 7-1-9.

Example continued:

अ + Lभस ्= एLभः 7-3-103, 1-1-21, 8-2-66, 8-3-15

191) 2-4-34 (aतीयाटौ��वेनः

व�ृ": इदमेतदोर�वादेशे। ‘इदम’् and ‘एतe’ get ‘एन’ as their replacement when followed by the affixes

of the second case or the affix ‘टा’ or ‘ओस’्, when used in अ�वादेश:।

अ�वादेश: (अनु + आदेश:) (re-employment or after-statement) means a second reference to one

and the same item already referred to by an earlier word.


इदम ्(अ�वादेशे) + अम ्4-1-2, 1-3-4 = एन + अम ्2-4-34, 1-1-55 = एनम ्6-1-107

192) 8-2-8 न �ङस|बुe_योः

व�ृ": न�य लोपो न, ङौ स|बFुौ च। नकारः does not take लोपः, when ‘�ङ’ or the स|ब�ुFः affix follows.


उदाहरणम ्– राजन ्+ सँु (स|ब�ुFः) = राजन ्1-3-2, 6-1-68, 8-2-8 stops 8-2-7.

193) 8-2-2 नलोपः सुX�वरसCDातिु�व�धषु कृ1त

व�ृ": सँुि}वधौ �वर�वधौ सCDा�वधौ कृ1त तुँि�वधौ च नलोपोऽLसFो ना�य�। The elision (लोपः) of the

letter ‘न’् (done by 8-2-7) is not visible to prior rules that are in following categories:

1. सँुि}वधौ – rules relating to सँुप ्affixes

2. �वर�वधौ – rules relating to accents (in the वेद:)

3. सCDा�वधौ – rules that give names or designations

4. कृ1त तुँि�वधौ – rules that prescribe a तुँक् augment in connection with a ‘कृत’् affix.

This rule limits the application of 8-2-1. As per 8-2-1, the elision of the letter ‘न’् (done by 8-2-7)

would not be visible to any prior rule. Now as per 8-2-2, the elision (लोपः) of the letter ‘न’् (done

47

by 8-2-7) is not visible only to those rules that are in the four categories mentioned above –

others will see the elision (लोपः) of the letter ‘न’् |

उदाहरणम ्– राजन ्+ kयाम ्= राज + kयाम ्1-4-17, 8-2-7 = राजkयाम।् Since this is a सँुप-्�व�ध:, the

elision (लोपः) of the letter ‘न’् remains अLसF: by 8-2-1. (8-2-2 cannot make it LसF:।) Hence 7-3-

102 cannot do the elongation (दIघा�देशः) of the ending letter ‘अ’ of the अEगम।्

194) 6-4-137 न संयोगाaम�तात ्

व�ृ": वम�तसंयोगादनोऽकार�य लोपो न। The अकारः of अन ्does not take लोपः (as ordained by 6-4-

134), when it follows a conjunct that has वकारः or मकारः as its last member.


आYमन ् + टा = आYमन ् + आ 1-3-7, अEगम ् gets भ-सCDा by 1-4-18, but 6-4-137 stops 6-4-

134 and we get the final form आYमना।

195) 6-4-12 इ�ह�पूषाय�|णा ंशौ

व�ृ": एषां शावेवोपधाया दIघ\ नाऽ�य�। The lengthening (ordained by 6-4-8) of the penultimate letter

of terms ending in ‘इन’्, ‘हन’्, ‘पूषन’् and ‘अय�मन’् should be done only when the Lश-]Yयय: follows,

not when followed by other सव�नाम�थानम ्affixes.


द:ुखहन ्+ सँु = द:ुखहन ्+ स ्1-3-2. Here 6-4-12 stops 6-4-8 from applying, but then the next rules

comes in.

गीतासु (aतीयम ्उदाहरणम ्– /ोकः Bg12-14

यो�गन ्+ सँु = यो�गन ्+ स ्1-3-2. Here 6-4-12 stops 6-4-8 from applying, but then the next rules

comes in.

Examples continued below:

196) 6-4-13 सौ च

व�ृ": इ�नादIनामुपधाया दIघ\ऽस|बFुौ सौ परे। The penultimate letter of terms ending in ‘इन’्, ‘हन’्,

‘पूषन’् and ‘अय�मन’् is lengthened when the सँु-]Yयय: – which is not स|ब�ुF: – follows.

Examples continued from above:

द:ुखहन ्+ स ्= द:ुखहान ्+ स ्6-4-13 = द:ुखहान ्6-1-68 = द:ुखहा 8-2-7

यो�गन ्+ स ्= योगीन ्+ स ्6-4-13 = योगीन ्6-1-68 = योगी 8-2-7

197) 8-4-12 एकाजु"रपदे णः

48

व�ृ": एकाजु"रपदं य�य ति�म�समासे पूव�पद�थाि�नLम"ाYपर�य ]ा1तप(दका�तनुँि|वभ��थ�य न�य णः

�यात।् The नकारः, at the end of a ]ा1तप(दकम,् of the augment नुँम ्or in a �वभ��ः affix, gets णकारः

as a replacement, when the 1नLम"म ्(cause – रेफः, षकारः, ऋवण�ः) that brings about the णYवम ्is

present in the former member of a compound and the latter member of that compound has only

one vowel.

उदाहरणम ्– व�ृहन ्+ औ = व�ृहन ्+ औ 6-4-8 is stopped by 6-4-12 = व�ृहणौ, the रेफः in the term

व�ृ causes the ]ा1तप(दका�तनकारः to become a णकारः by 8-4-12, because the latter part (हन)् of

the compound has only one vowel.

198) 7-3-54 हो ह�तेिCण��नेष ु

व�ृ": �ञ1त 6ण1त ]Yयये नकारे च परे ह�तेह�कार�य कुYवं �यात।् The हकारः of √हन ्(हनँ (हसंागYयोः

२. २) gets replaced by a letter of the कवग�: when followed by an affix with ञकारः or णकारः as an

इत ्, or when followed (immediately) by a नकारः।


199) 1-1-50 �थानेऽ�तरतमः

व�ृ": ]सEगे स1त स3शतम आदेशः �यात।् When a substitute is ordained, the closest substitute is

intended.

उदाहरणम ्– व�ृहन ्+ शस ्= व�ृहन ्+ अस ्1-3-8 = व�ृ¦ + अस ्6-4-134 = व�ृ�नः 7-3-54, 1-1-50, 8-

2-66, 8-3-15.

7-3-54 ordains कुYवम ्for the हकारः। Of the five letters in the क-वग�ः (क्, ख,् ग,् घ,् E), घ ्is the

closest substitute because it is both voiced (घोषवान)् as well as aspirate (महा]ाण:) just like the

हकार:।

200) 6-4-128 मघवा बहुलम ्

व�ृ": मघवन ्श}द�य वा तृँ इYय�तादेशः �यात।् ‘मघवन’् gets ‘तृँ’ as a replacement optionally.

उदाहरणम ्– मघवन ्+ सँु = मघवतृँ + स ्6-4-128, 1-1-52, 1-3-2, 1-3-9 = मघवत ्+ स ्1-3-2, 1-3-9 –


201) 7-1-70 उ�गदचां सव�नाम�थानेऽधातोः

व�ृ": अधातोS�गतो नलो�पनोऽCचतेT नुँमागमः �यात ्सव�नाम�थाने परे। A non-verbal base with a उक्

(‘उ’, ‘ऋ’, ‘ऌ’) letter as a marker and the verbal base ‘अCचुँ’ whose letter ‘न’् has taken elision takes

the augment नुँम ्when followed by a सव�नाम�थानम ्affix.

उदाहरणम ्continued – मघवत ्+ स ्= मघव नुँम ्त ्+ स ्7-1-70, 1-1-47 = मघव�त ्+ स ्1-3-2, 1-3-

3 = मघव�त ्6-1-68 = मघवन ्8-2-23 = मघवान ्6-4-8, 1-1-62 (Note: On the basis of the word ‘बहुलम’्

49

used in 6-4-128, 6-4-8 was allowed to apply after 8-2-23. Normally an operation done by 8-2-

23 should be अLसFम ्for any earlier rule like6-4-8.)

202) 8-3-24 नTापदा�त�य झLल

व�ृ": न�य म�य चापदा�त�य झ[ यन�ु वारः। नकारः and मकारः which do not occur at the end of a

पदम ्get अन�ुवारः as replacement when a झल ्letter follows.

Example under next rule.

203) 8-4-58 अनु�वार�य य1य परसवण�ः

व�ृ": अन�ुवार�य य1य परतः परसवणा�देशो भव1त। When a यय ् letter follows, अन�ुवारः gets the

सवण�ः of the यय ्letter as its replacement.

उदाहरणम ्– मघवन ्+ औ = मघवत ्+ औ 6-4-128, 1-3-2 = मघव�त ्+ औ 7-1-70, 1-1-47, 1-3-2, 1-

3-3 = मघवतंौ 8-3-24= मघव�तौ 8-4-58

204) 6-4-133 Qयुवमघोनामत�Fते

व�ृ": अ�न�तानां भसCDकानाम ्एषाम ्अत�Fते परे स|]सारण ं�यात।् The ‘अन’् ending ‘Qन’्, ‘यवुन’्

and ‘मघवन’्, which have the भ-सCDा, take स|]सारणम ्when followed by an affix which is not a

त�Fतः।


205) 1-1-45 इ�यणः स|]सारणम ्

व�ृ": यणः �थाने ]य�ुयमानो य इक्, स स|]सारणसCDः �यात।् The इक् letter that is ordained in the

place of a यण ्letter gets the designation स|]सारणम।्


Qन ् + �ङ = Qन ् + इ 1-3-8, Qन ् gets भ-सCDा by 1-4-18 = श ् उ अन ् + इ 6-4-133, 1-1-45 –

Example continued under next rule.

206) 6-1-108 स|]सारणाrच

व�ृ": स|]सारणाद�च पूव�Oपमेकादेशः। When a स|]सारणम ्is followed by a अच ्(vowel), there is a

single replacement (in place of both the स|]सारणम ्and the following अच)् of the prior letter (the

स|]सारणम)्।

उदाहरणम ्continued – श ्उ अन ्+ इ = श ्उन ्+ इ 6-1-108 = शु1न

207) 6-1-37 न स|]सारणे स|]सारणम ्

50

व�ृ": स|]सारणे परतः पवू��य यणः स|]सारण ंन �यात।् When a स|]सारणम ्follows, the यण ्that

precedes does not get स|]सारणम ् as replacement. By this Dापकम,् the last यण ् takes

स|]सारणम ्first. And after that the earlier यण ्does not get स|]सारणम।्

उदाहरणम ्– युवन ्+ शस ्= युवन ्+ अस ्1-3-8, 1-3-4, यवुन ्gets भ-सCDा by 1-4-18 = यु उ अन ्+

अस ्6-4-133, 6-1-37 = यु उन ्+ अस ्6-1-108 = यनूः 6-1-101, 8-2-66, 8-3-15

208) 7-1-85 प�थम यभुृMामात ्

व�ृ": एषामाकारोऽ�तादेशः सौ परे। ‘प�थन’्, ‘म�थन’् and ‘ऋभु¢Mन’् get आकारः as an अ�तादेशः when

followed by the affix ‘सँु’.

उदाहरणम ् – प�थन ् + सँु 4-1-2 = प�थन ् + स ्1-3-2, 1-3-9 = प�थ आ + स ्7-1-85 – Example

continued under next rule.

209) 7-1-86 इतोऽत ्सव�नाम�थाने

व�ृ": प यादेjरकार�य अकारः �यात ्सव�नाम�थाने परे। The इकारः of ‘प�थन’्, ‘म�थन’् and ‘ऋभु¢Mन’् gets

अकारः as replacement when they are followed by a सव�नाम�थानम ्affix.

उदाहरणम ्continued – प�थ आ + स ्= पथ आ + स ्7-1-86 – Example continued under next rule.

210) 7-1-87 थो �थः

व�ृ": प�थमथोस ्थ�य �थादेशः �यात,् सव�नाम�थाने परे। The थकारः of ‘प�थन’् and ‘म�थन’् gets ‘�थ’् as

replacement when they are followed by a सव�नाम�थानम ्affix.

उदाहरणम ्continued – पथ आ + स ्= प�थ आ + स ्7-1-87 = प�थाः 6-1-101, 8-2-66, 8-3-15

211) 7-1-88 भ�य टेल\पः

व�ृ": भसCDक�य प यादे� टेल\पः �यात।् When ‘प�थन’्, ‘म�थन’् or ‘ऋभु¢Mन’् has the भ-सCDा, its (ट-

भागः takes लोपः।


प�थन ्+ �ङ = प�थन ्+ इ 1-3-8, 1-3-9. ‘प�थन’् gets the भ-सCDा by 1-4-18 = पथ ्+ इ 7-1-88, 1-1-

64 = प�थ

212) 1-1-24 �णा�ता षt

व�ृ": षा�ता ना�ता च सE>या षtसCDा �यात।् A numeral stem ending in षकारः or नकारः gets the

designation षt।


51

पCचन ्+ शस ्– Since पCचन ्has the षt सCDा by 1-1-24 we get = पCचन ्7-1-22 = पCच 8-2-7

213) 6-4-7 नोपधायाः

व�ृ": ना�त�योपधाया दIघ�ः �या�नाLम परे। The penultimate vowel of an अEगम ्ending in a नकारः is

lengthened when followed by नाम।्

उदाहरणम ्– पCचन ्+ आम ्– Since पCचन ्has the षt सCDा by 1-1-24 we get = पCचन ्+ नाम ्7-1-

55, 1-1-46, 1-3-2,1-3-3 = पCचान ्+ नाम ्6-4-7 – Since पCचान ्has पद-सCDा here by 1-4-17 we

get = पCचानाम ्8-2-7

214) 7-2-84 अ4न आ �वभ�ौ

व�ृ": अ4न आYवं वा �याe हलादौ �वभ�ौ। When followed by a �वभ��ः affix that begins with a हल ्

letter, अ4न ्optionally gets आकारः as अ�तादेशः. This rule is also applied when जस ्and शस ्

follow, on the basis of the Dापकम ् (indication) given in the rule 7-1-21।

Note: The optionality of this rule is inferred from the rule 6-1-172 अ4नो दIघा�त ्।

उदाहरणम ्– अ4न ्+ जस ्= अ4 आ + जस ्7-2-84 = अ4ा + जस ्6-1-101 – example continued

under next rule.

215) 7-1-21 अ4ाkय औश ्

व�ृ": कृताकाराe अ4नः परयोज�pशसोर ्औश ्�यात।् The जस ्and शस ्affixes, that follow अ4न ्which

has taken आकारः as अ�तादेशः, get औश ्as replacement.

उदाहरणम ्continued – अ4ा + जस ्= अ4ा + औश ्7-1-21, 1-1-55 = अ4ा + औ 1-3-3 = अ4ौ 6-1-88

216) 3-2-59 ऋिYव�दध�ृ�ि�दगुि�णगCचयुुिज:ुCचां च

व�ृ": एkयः ि�वन ्�यात।् The five terms ‘ऋिYवज’्, ‘दधषृ’्, ‘�ज’्, ‘(दश’् and ‘उि�णc’ are given as

ready-made forms ending in the affix ि�वनँ।् Also, when the verbal root √अCच ्(‘अCचुँ’

ग1तपजूनयोः १. २१५) has a सुब�त-उपपदम ्or when √युज ्(युिजँर ्योगे ७. ७) and √:ुCच ्(:ुCचँ

कौ(ट[या[पीभावयोः १. २१३) have no उपपदम,् the affix ि�वनँ ् is used. When the affix is used

after √:ुCच,् the verbal base does not take नकार-लोपः।

उदाहरणम ्– ‘ऋिYवज’् is given as a ready-made form ending in the ि�वनँ ्affix.


217) 3-1-93 कृद1तE

व�ृ": अ� धाYव�धकारे 1तELभ�नः ]Yययः कृYसCDः �यात।् In the धाYव�धकारः starting with 3-1-

91 धातोः, all the affixes other than the 1तE affixes get the designation कृत।्

Example continued:

52

The ि�वनँ ्affix (prescribed by 3-2-59) gets the कृत-्सCDा because it comes in the 3-1-91 धातोः

अ�धकारः and it is not a 1तE-]Yयय: (ref. 3-4-78).

218) 6-1-67 वेरप�ृ�य

व�ृ": अप�ृ�य व�य लोपः। The वकारः which is अप�ृः (a single letter ]Yययः), takes लोपः।

Note: ‘वे:’ in the सू�म ्is षxी-�वभ��: of the ]ा1तप(दकम ्‘�व’. The इकार: in ‘�व’ is only for the sake of

pronunciation (उrचारणाथ�:) – so only वकार: is implied by ‘�व’.

Example continued:

The entire ि�वनँ-्]Yययः takes लोपः as follows – The ककार:, इँकार: and नकार: are removed using

the usual rules1-3-8, 1-3-2 and 1-3-3 along with 1-3-9. After this only the single letter वकार:

remains. It is also removed by 6-1-67.

Even though, the entire ि�वनँ-्]Yयय: has gone away, as per 1-1-62, it leaves its लMणम ्(mark)

behind. So now, ऋिYवज ्gets the ]ा1तप(दक-सCDा by 1-2-46.

219) 8-2-30 चोः कुः

व�ृ": चवग��य कवग�ः �या�झLल पदा�ते च। The consonants of the च-वग�: (च,् l, ज,् झ,् ञ)् get the

consonants of the क-वग�: (क्, ख,् ग,् घ,् E) as a replacement when they occur at the end of a पदम ्

or when they are followed by a झल ्letter.

Example continued:

ऋिYवज ्+ सँु = ऋिYवज ्1-3-2, 6-1-68

Now ऋिYवज ् gets the पद-सCDा by 1-1-62, 1-4-14. And hence the ending जकार: would be

replaced by the closest letter of the क-वग�: – which is गकार: – but the next rule intervenes.

220) 8-2-36 ªT-��ज-सजृ-मजृ-यज-राज-�ाजrछशां षः

व�ृ": ªTादIनां स`ानां छशा�तयोT षकारोऽ�तादेशः �या�झLल पदा�ते च। The seven verbal roots

listed – √ªT ्(ओ«ªTू ँ छेदने ६. १२), √��ज ्(��जँ पाके ६. ४), √सजृ ्(सजँृ �वसगH ६.

१५०), √मजृ ्(मजृूँ शुFौ २. ६१), √यज ्(यजँ देवपूजासEग1तकरणदानेषु १. ११५७), √राज ्(राजृँ दI`ौ १.

९५६) and √�ाज ्(टु�ाजृँ दI`ौ १. ९५७) – and terms ending in the letter ‘l’ or the letter ‘श’् get the

letter ‘ष’् as a replacement, when they are at the end of a पदम ्or are followed by a झल ्letter.

Note: As per 1-1-52 अलोऽ�Yय�य only the ending letter is replaced by the letter ‘ष’्।

उदाहरणम ्– राज ्+ सँु = राज ्1-3-2, 6-1-68 = राष ्8-2-36 = रा� 8-2-39 = राt, रा� 8-4-56.

Example continued from prior rule:

By this rule 8-2-36, the ending जकार: of ऋिYवज ्would have become a षकार: but the following

special rule comes into play.

221) 8-2-62 ि�व�]Yयय�य कुः

53

व�ृ": ि�वन-्]Yययो य�मात ्त�य कवग\ऽ�तादेशः �यात ्पदा�ते। The terms that can take the affix

ि�वनँ,् take the क-वग�: consonants as a replacement for their last letter, when they occur at the

end of a पदम।्

Example completed:

ऋिYवज ्+ सँु = ऋिYवज ्1-3-2, 6-1-68 = ऋिYवग ्8-2-62 = ऋिYवक्, ऋिYवग ्8-4-56.

222) 8-2-29 �कोः संयोगाuोर�ते च

व�ृ": पदा�ते झLल च परे यः संयोग�तदाuोः सकारककारयोल\पः �यात।् The सकारः or ककारः at the

beginning of a conjunct takes लोपः when the conjunct is at the end of a पदम ्or followed by a झल ्

letter.

उदाहरणम ् – भ�ृज ् + सँु = भ�ृज ्1-3-2, 6-1-68 = भजृ ्1-4-14, 8-2-29 (Note: 8-2-23 is over-ruled

by 8-2-29) = भषृ ्8-2-36 = भ�ृ 8-2-39 = भtृ, भ�ृ 8-4-56

223) 8-4-53 झलां जश ्झLश

व�ृ": झलां �थाने जशादेशो भव1त झLश परतः। The झल ् letters are replaced by जश ्letters when

they are followed by a झश ्letter.

उदाहरणम ्– भ�ृज ्+ औ 4-1-2 = भpृजौ 8-4-40 = भ�ृजौ 8-4-53

224) 7-2-106 तदोः सः सावन�Yययोः

व�ृ": YयदादIना ंतकारदकारयोरन�Yययोः सः �यात ्सौ। When the affix ‘सँु’ follows, the तकारः or दकारः

belonging to any pronoun (सव�नाम-श}द:) starting with ‘Yयe’ and ending with ‘(a’, gets सकारः as a

replacement as long as the तकारः or दकारः does not occur at the end of the pronoun.


तe + सँु = त अ + स ्1-3-2, 7-2-102 = त + स ्6-1-97 = सः 7-2-106, 8-2-66, 8-3-15

225) 8-1-20 यु�मद�मदोः षxी-चतुथ�-(aतीया�थयोवा��नावौ

व�ृ": पदाYपरयोरपादादौ ि�थतयोः ष°या(द�वLश4योर ्यु�मद�मदोर ्वा�नौ इYयादेशौ �तः। The ]ा1तप(दके

‘यु�मe’ and ‘अ�मe’ along with an affix of the second, fourth or sixth case, get ‘वाम’् and ‘नौ’ as

replacements respectively when the following conditions are satisfied:

1. There is a पदम ् in the same sentence preceding ‘यु�मe’/’अ�मe’।

2. ‘यु�मe’/’अ�मe’ is not at the beginning of a metrical पाद:।

उदाहरणे -

ईQरो वा ं(यवुाम)् पpय1त। ईQरो नौ (आवाम)् पpय1त।

54

226) 8-1-21 बहुवचन�य व�नसौ

व�ृ": उ��वधयोर ् अनयोः ष°या(दबहुवचना�तयोर ् व�नसौ �तः। The ]ा1तप(दके ‘य�ुमe’ and ‘अ�मe’

along with a plural affix of the second, fourth or sixth case, get ‘वस’् and ‘नस’् as replacements

respectively when the two conditions mentioned above are satisfied.


गावो व: (यु�माकम)् सि�त। अजा न: (अ�माकम)् सि�त।

227) 8-1-22 तेमयावेकवचन�य

व�ृ": उ��वधयोर ्अनयोः षxीचतु यHकवचना�तयो�ते मे एतौ �तः। The ]ा1तप(दके ‘यु�मe’ and ‘अ�मe’

along with a singular affix of the fourth or sixth case, get ‘ते’ and ‘मे’ as replacements respectively

when the two conditions mentioned above are satisfied.


नम�ते (तkुयम)् अ�तु। भोजनं मे (मfम)् ]यrछ।

228) 8-1-23 Yवामौ (aतीयायाः

व�ृ": (aतीयकैवचना�तयो�Yवा मा इYयादेशौ �तः। The ]ा1तप(दके ‘यु�मe’ and ‘अ�मe’ along with a

singular affix of the second case, get ‘Yवा’ and ‘मा’ as replacements respectively when the two

conditions mentioned above are satisfied.


अहं Yवा (Yवाम)् सव�पापेkयो मोM1य�याLम मा शुचः|

(aतीयम ्उदाहरणम ्-

लोको मा (माम)् पpय1त।

229) 8-1-24 न चवाहाहैवयु�े

व�ृ": च, वा, ह, अह, एव एLभर ्यु�े यु�मद�मदोः वा�नावादयो न भवि�त। If any of the five च, वा, ह, अह,

एव are joined to a form of the word ‘यु�मe’ or ‘अ�मe’, the above replacements that have been

ordained will not take place.

55

उदाहरणम ्– हjर�Yवां मा ंच रMतु। – Here, the Yवाम ्and माम ्cannot be replaced by Yवा and मा

because they are in combination with च।

230) वा�"�कम ्– समानवा�ये यु�मद�मदादेशा व�{याः।

व�ृ": The above replacements that have been ordained in the place of ‘य�ुमe’ and ‘अ�मe’ will

happen only within a single sentence.

उदाहरणम ्– ओदन ं पच तव भ�व�य1त। – Here by the maxim ‘एक1तE वा�यम’्, there are two

sentences (ओदनं पच and तव भ�व�य1त). So here तव will not get replaced by ते because the

पदम ्that precedes it does not belong to the same sentence.

231) वा�"�कम ्– एते वा�नावादयोऽन�वादेशे वा व�{याः।

व�ृ": When not used in अ�वादेशः, the above ordained replacements for ‘यु�मe’ and ‘अ�मe’

happen optionally. They happen always if ‘यु�मe’ and ‘अ�मe’ are used in अ�वादेशः।

उदाहरणम ्– धाता ते भ�ोऽि�त। धाता तव भ�ोऽि�त। – Brahma is your devotee. Here because we

do not have अ�वादेशः, तव gets ते as a replacement optionally.

योऽि�नह�{यवाt त�मै ते नमः – You, the fire that carries the sacrificial materials, salutations to you.

Here since there is अ�वादेशः we always have ते instead of the form तkुयम।्

232) 6-4-24 अ1न(दतां हल उपधायाः ि�ङ1त

व�ृ": हल�तानाम ्अ1न(दताम ्अEगानाम ्उपधाया न�य लोपः wक1त �ङ1त। The penultimate letter ‘न’् of

bases that end in a consonant and that do not have the letter ‘इ’ as a marker, takes लोपः (elision)

when followed by an affix that has either the letter ‘क्’ or ‘E’ as a marker.

उदाहरणम ्– ] अ�च ्– this gets the ि�वनँ-्]Yययः by 3-2-59. ि�वनँ ्takes सवा�पहारलोपः by 1-3-2, 1-

3-3, 1-3-8, 6-1-67. Now, since ि�वनँ ्is a wकत-्]Yययः, by 6-4-24, the उपधा-नकारः of अ�च ्takes

लोपः to give ] अच।्


233) 6-4-138 अचः

व�ृ": लु`नकार�याCचतेभ��याकार�य लोपः �यात।् The अकारः of the verbal root अ�चुँ whose नकारः

has taken लोपः and which has the भ-सCDा, takes लोपः।

56

उदाहरणम ्– ] अच ्+ शस ्4-1-2 = ] अच ्+ अस ्1-3-4, 1-3-8, अEगम ्has भ-सCDा by 1-4-18 = ] च ्

+ अस ्6-4-138


234) 6-3-138 चौ

व�ृ": लु`ाऽकारनकारेऽCचतौ परे पूव��याऽणो दIघ�ः �यात।् The अण ् letter preceding the verbal base

अ�चुँ whose अकारः and नकारः have taken लोपः, will be elongated.

उदाहरणम ्– ] च ्+ अस ्6-4-138 = ]ाचः 6-3-138, 8-2-66, 8-3-15

235) 6-4-139 उद ईत ्

व�ृ": उrछ}दात ्पर�य लु`नकाराCचतेभ��याकार�य ईत।् The अकारः of the verbal root अ�चुँ, whose

नकारः has taken लोपः, is replaced by ईकारः when preceded by उe।

उदाहरणम ्– उe अच ्+ शस ्4-1-2 = उe अच ्+ अस ्1-3-4, 1-3-8, अEगम ्has भ-सCDा by 1-4-18 =

उe ईच ्+ अस ्6-4-139 = उदIचः 8-2-66, 8-3-15

236) 6-3-93 समः सLम

व�ृ": व]Yयया�तेऽCचतौ परे समः स|यादेशः �यात।् सम ्gets सLम as its replacement when it is

followed by the verb अ�चुँ that ends in a affix having a वकार:।

उदाहरणम ्– सम ्अ�च ्– this gets the ि�वनँ-्]Yययः by 3-2-59. ि�वनँ ्takes सवा�पहारलोपः by 1-3-

2, 1-3-3, 1-3-8, 6-1-67. Now, since ि�वनँ ् is a wकत-्]Yययः, by 6-4-24, the उपधा-नकारः of अ�च ्

takes लोपः to give सम ्अच.् By 6-3-93, सम ्gets the सLम-आदेशः to give सLम + अच।्

237) 6-3-94 1तरसि�तय�लोपे

व�ृ": अलु`ाकारेऽCचतौ व]Yयया�ते परे 1तरसि�तया�देशः �यात।् 1तरस ्gets 1तjर as its replacement,

when it is followed by the verb अ�चुँ that ends in a affix having a वकार:। This substitution does

not take place when the अकारः of अ�चुँ takes लोपः।

उदाहरणम ्– 1तरस ्अच ्+ सँु 4-1-2 = 1तjर अच ्स ्1-3-2, 6-3-94 = 1तjर अनुँ|च ्स ्7-1-70, 1-1-47 =

1तjर अ�च ्स ्1-3-2,1-3-3 = 1तjर अ�च ्6-1-68 = 1तय��च ्6-1-77 = 1तय�न ्8-2-23 = 1तय�E 8-2-62.

238) 6-4-10 सा�त महतः संयोग�य

व�ृ": सा�तसंयोग�य महतT यो नकार�त�योपधाया दIघ�ः �यादस|बुFौ सव�नाम�थाने। When a

सव�नाम�थानम ्affix other than a स|बु�Fः follows, the letter preceding the नकारः of a base that

ends in a सा�त-संयोग: (a conjunct ending in a सकार:) or of the word महत ्is elongated.


57

By the उणा(द-सू�म ्‘वत�माने पषृe-बहृ�मह�जगe शतृँवrच।’ the ]ा1तप(दकम ्‘महत’् will undergo the

same operations as a शतृँ-]Yयया�त-श}द:। This makes it उ�गत ्(one that has an उक् letter as an

इत)् and hence 7-1-70 can apply.

महत ्+ सँु 4-1-2 = महनुँ|त ्+ स ्1-3-2, 7-1-70, 1-1-47 = मह�त ्+ स ्1-3-2, 1-3-3 = महा�त ्+ स ्6-4-

10 = महा�त ्6-1-68 = महान ्8-2-23. Note: After this 8-2-7 cannot be applied because of 8-2-1.

239) 6-4-14 अYवस�त�य चाधातोः

व�ृ": अYव�त�योपधाया दIघ\ धातुLभ�नाऽस�त�य चाऽस|बुFौ सौ परे। When the ‘सँु’ affix which is not

स|ब�ुFः follows, a base that ends in ‘अतुँ’ or a base that ends in ‘अस’् which is not of a verbal root,

has its penultimate letter elongated.


बलवत ्+ सँु 4-1-2 = बलवात ्+ स ्6-4-14, 1-3-2

Note: 7-1-70 is actually a later rule, and also an invariable rule (1नYय-काय�म)् compared to 6-4-14.

So as per 1-4-2, we should apply 7-1-70 before 6-4-14. But if we do that then the mention of ‘अत’ु

in 6-4-14 would become useless – it would never find application because then the उपधा would

always be a नकार:। So on the basis of वचनसाम या�त ् we apply 6-4-14 before 7-1-70.

Now we get बलवा�त ्+ स ्7-1-70, 1-1-47, 1-3-2, 1-3-3 = बलवा�त ्6-1-68 = बलवान ्8-2-23. Note:

After this 8-2-7cannot be applied because of 8-2-1.

240) 6-1-5 उभे अkय�तम ्

व�ृ": षाx(aYव]करणे ये aे �व(हते ते उभे समु(दते अkय�तसCDे �तः। The double words that result

due to the doubling done using the rules of the sixth chapter (from 6-1-1 to 6-1-12), together get

the अkय�तम ्designation.

उदाहरणम ्– ददत ्– This is the शतृँ-]Yयया�तः of the दा-धातु:। Since this धात:ु is in the जुहोYया(द-

गणः, the final form is derived through reduplication (अkयासः) using 6-1-10. Here, the दe of ददत ्

gets अkय�त-सCDा by 6-1-5.

241) 7-1-78 नाkय�ताrछतुः

व�ृ": अkय�तात ्पर�य शतनुु�म ्न �यात।् The ‘शतृँ’ affix that follows an अkय�तम ्does not get the

नुँम ्augment.

उदाहरणम ्– ददत ्+ सँु 4-1-2 = ददत ्+ स ्1-3-2 = ददत ्6-1-68. Now 7-1-78 stops 7-1-70 and we get

ददe 8-2-39 = ददत,् ददe 8-4-56.

242) 3-2-60 Yयदा(दष ु3शोऽनालोचने कCच

व�ृ": Yयदा(दषूपपदे�वDानाथा�e 3शेः कञ ्�याrचात ्ि�वन।् When the words Yयe etc. stand as उपपदम,्

the verbal root 3श,् when it does not mean knowledge, takes the कञ ्and ि�वनँ ्affixes.

58


243) 6-3-91 आ सव�ना|नः

व�ृ": सव�ना|न आकारोऽ�तादेशः �याe 3�3शवतुँष।ु When 3श,् 3श or वतुँ follows, सव�नाम-श}दाः get

आकारः as a replacement for their last letter.

उदाहरणम ्– तe + 3श ्+ कञ ्3-2-60 = त आ + 3श 1-3-3, 1-3-8, 6-3-91 = ता3श 6-1-101

244) (under 8-4-45) वा�"�कम ्]Yयये भाषायां 1नYयम।्

When an affix follows, the rule 8-4-45, even though optional, is always applied in Classical

Sanskrit.

उदाहरणम ्– षष ्+ आम ्4-1-2 = षष ्+ नाम ्7-1-55, 1-1-46, 1-3-2, 1-3-3, अEगम ्has पद-सCDा by 1-

4-17 = ष� + नाम8्-2-39 = ष� + णाम ्8-4-41 (Note: 8-4-42 does not stop णYवम ्because the सू�म ्

mentions अनाम ्and excludes नाम ् from the 1नषेधः) = षnणाम ्8-4-45, by the वा�"�कम ् ‘]Yयये

भाषायां 1नYयम’्, णYवम ्is always done.

245) 8-2-76 व\Sपधाया दIघ� इकः

व�ृ": रेफवा�त�य धातोSपधाया इको दIघ�ः �यात ्पदा�ते। The penultimate इक् letter (‘इ’, ‘उ’, ‘ऋ’, ‘ऌ’)

of a पदम ्is elongated when the पदम ्ends in a रेफ: or a वकार: of a धातु:।

उदाहरणम ्– 1नराLशस ्+ सँु 4-1-2 = 1नराLशस ्1-3-2, 6-1-68 = 1नराLशSँ 8-2-66 = 1नराशीर ्1-3-2, 8-2-

76 = 1नराशीः 8-3-15

246) 8-3-60 शाLसवLसघसीना ंचशाLसवLसघसीना ंचशाLसवLसघसीना ंचशाLसवLसघसीना ंच

व�ृ": इnकुkया ंपर�यषैा ंस�य षः �यात।् The letter ‘स’् belonging to the verbal root √शास ्(शासँु

अनLुश4ौ २. ७०) or √वस(्वसँ 1नवासे १. ११६०) or √घस ्(घस ॢँ अदने १. ८१२ as well as the

substitute ‘घस ॢ’ँ which comes in place of अदँ भMणे २. १) is substituted by the letter ‘ष’् when

preceded by either a letter of the ‘इण’्-]Yयाहार: or a letter of the क-वग�:।

उदाहरणम ्– 1नराLशस ्+ औ 4-1-2 = 1नराLशषौ 8-3-60

247) 8-3-58 निु|वसज�नीयश{य�वायेऽ�प

व�ृ": एतैः ]Yयेकं {यवधानेऽ�प इnकुkया ंपर�य स�य मूध��यादेशः �यात।् The सकारः following an इण ्

letter or a consonant of the क-वग�ः gets षकारः as its replacement, even when any one of the

following may intervene – the नुँम ्augment, the �वसग�ः or a शर ्letter.

उदाहरणम ्– 1नराLशस ्+ सुप ्= 1नराशीर ्+ सु 1-3-3, 8-2-66, 1-3-2, 8-2-76 = 1नराशीः + सु 8-3-15 =

1नराशीः + सु, 1नराशीस ्+ सु 8-3-34, 8-3-36

1नराशीः + सु = 1नराशीःष ु8-3-58

or

59

1नराशीस ्+ सु = 1नराशी�ष ु8-3-58, 8-4-41

248) 6-4-131 वसोः स|]सारणम ्

व�ृ": व�व�त�य भ�य स|]सारण ं�यात।् A अEगम ्that ends in the ‘वसँु’ affix and has the भ-सCDा

takes स|]सारणम।्

उदाहरणम ्– �वaस ्+ शस ्4-1-2, अEगम ्has भ-सCDा by 1-4-18 = �वaस ्+ अस ्1-3-4, 1-3-8 = �वद ु

अस ्+ अस ्6-4-131,6-1-37 = �वदसुस ्6-1-108 = �वदसुः 8-2-66, 8-3-15 = �वदषुः 8-3-59

249) 7-1-89 पुंसोऽसँुE

व�ृ": सव�नाम�थाने �वव¢Mते पंुसोऽसँुE �यात।् When the intention is to add a सव�नाम�थानम ्affix,

‘पु|स’् gets the substitution ‘असँुE’।

उदाहरणम ् – पुंस ् + सँु 4-1-2 = पुम ् असँुE + स ्1-3-2, 7-1-89, 1-1-53 = पुमस ् + स ्1-3-2, 1-3-3 =

पुम�स ्+ स ्7-1-70, 1-1-47, 1-3-2, 1-3-3 = पुमा�स ्+ स ्6-4-10 = पुमा�स ्6-1-68 = पुमान ्8-2-23

250) वा�"�कम ्(under 7-1-94) – अ� य स|बुFौ वानE, नलोपp च वा वाr यः।

When the स|ब�ुF: affix follows, the (ending) letter ‘स’् of the ]ा1तप(दकम ् ‘उशनस’् takes the

substitution ‘अनँE’ optionally and the letter ‘न’् is also optionally elided.

उदाहरणम ्– Thus in स|ब�ुF: we get three forms as follows:

1. When the substitution ‘अनँE’ is not done, then ‘उशनस’् declines like ‘वेधस’् and we get (हे) उशन:।

2. When the substitution ‘अनँE’ is done then we get (हे) उशनस ्+ सँु (स|बु�F:) 4-1-2 = उशन अनँE

+ सँु 7-1-94, 1-1-53 = उशन अन ्+ स ्1-3-2, 1-3-3 = उशनन ्+ स ्6-1-97 = (हे) उशनन ्6-1-68. (8-2-

8 stops 8-2-7.)

3. As per the वा�"�कम ्mentioned above, the letter ‘न’् is also optionally elided so we get the third

form (हे) उशन।

251) 7-2-107 अदस औ सुलोपT

व�ृ": अदस औकारोऽ�तादेशः �याYसौ परे सुलोपT। There is a substitution of the letter ‘औ’ in place of

(the ending letter) of ‘अदस’् when the affix ‘सँु’ follows, and the affix ‘सँु’ is elided.

उदाहरणम ्– अदस ्+ सँु 4-1-2 = अद औ 7-2-107 = अदौ 6-1-88 = असौ 7-2-106

252) 8-2-80 अदसोऽसेदा�द ुदो मः

व�ृ": अदसोऽसा�त�य दाYपर�य उदतूौ �तो द�य मT। There is a substitution of the letter ‘उ’/’ऊ’ in

place of the letter (vowel) following the letter ‘e’ of ‘अदस’् and the letter ‘e’ gets substituted by the

letter ‘म’्। This rule does not apply when the letter ‘स’् is at the end of ‘अदस’्।

60

Note: As per 1-1-50, the letter ‘उ’ is the substitute if the vowel following the letter ‘e’ is s�व:

(short) and the letter ‘ऊ’ is the substitute if the vowel following the letter ‘e’ is दIघ�: (long.)


अदस ्+ औ 4-1-2 = अद अ + औ 7-2-102 = अद + औ 6-1-97 = अदौ 6-1-88 = अमू 8-2-80

अदस ्+ अम ्4-1-2 = अद अ + अम ्7-2-102 = अद + अम ्6-1-97 = अदम ्6-1-107, 1-3-4 = अमुम ्8-2-

80

253) 8-2-81 एत ई³हुवचने

व�ृ": अदसो दाYपर�यैत ई´�य च मो बqथ\�ौ। In the plural, the letter ‘ई’ is substituted in place of

the letter ‘ए’ that follows the letter ‘e’ of ‘अदस’् and the letter ‘e’ gets substituted by the letter ‘म’्।


अदस ्+ जस ्4-1-2 = अद अ + जस ्7-2-102 = अद + जस ्6-1-97 = अद + शी 7-1-17 = अद + ई 1-3-

8 = अदे 6-1-87 = अमी8-2-81

254) 8-2-3 न मु ने

व�ृ": नाभावे कत�{ ये कृते च मुभावो नाऽLसFः। When the substitution ‘ना’ (by 7-3-120) is to be done

or has been done, the substitution ‘मु’ is not treated as if suspended (अLसF:)।

उदाहरणम ्– अदस ्+ टा 4-1-2 = अद अ + टा 7-2-102 = अद + टा 6-1-97 = अमु + टा 8-2-80 (Note: 7-

1-12 was not applied because doing so will make 8-2-3 useless) = अमुना 8-2-3, 1-4-7, 7-3-

120 (Note: 7-3-102 does not apply because of 8-2-3.)

255) 6-3-116 न(हव1ृतव�ृष{य�धS�चस(हत1नषु �वौ

व�ृ": न(ह व1ृत व�ृष {य�ध S�च स(ह त1न इYयेतेष ु ि�वप-्]Yयया�तेष ु उ"रपदेषु पूव�पद�य दIघ\ भव1त

सं(हतायां �वषये। When one of the following verbal roots – नc वतृ ्वषृ ्{यध ्Sच ्सc तन ्– that

ends in the affix ि�वपँ ्follows, then the (ending vowel) of the पूव�पदम ्in the compound gets

elongated.

उदाहरणम ्– उप + नc ि�वपँ ्= उपा + नc ि�वपँ ्6-3-116 = उपानc 1-3-2, 1-3-3, 1-3-8, 6-1-67

256) 8-2-34 नहो धः

व�ृ": नहो ह�य धः �या�झLल पदा�ते च। The letter ‘c’ of the verbal root ‘नc’ is substituted by the

letter ‘ध’् when it is at the end of a पदम ्or when a झल ्letter follows.

उदाहरणम ्– उपानc + kयाम ्4-1-2 (अEगम ्has the पद-सCDा by 1-4-17) = उपानध ्+ kयाम ्8-2-34 =

उपानekयाम ्8-2-39।

257) 7-1-84 (दव औत ्

61

व�ृ": (द�व1त ]ा1तप(दक�यौY�याYसौ। The (ending letter) of the ]ा1तप(दकम ्‘(दव’् is substituted by

the letter ‘औ’ when the affix ‘सँु’ follows.

उदाहरणम ्– (दव ्+ सँु 4-1-2 = (द औ + सँु 7-1-84 = uौ: 6-1-77, 8-2-66, 8-3-15

258) 6-1-131 (दव उत ्

व�ृ": (दवोऽ�तादेश उकारः �यात ्पदा�ते। The (ending letter) of the ]ा1तप(दकम ्‘(दव’् is substituted by

the letter ‘उ’ when it is at the end of a पदम।्

उदाहरणम ्– (दव ्+ kयाम ्4-1-2 = (द उ + kयाम ्1-4-17, 6-1-131 = uुkयाम ्6-1-77

259) 7-2-110 यः सौ

व�ृ": इदमो दकार�य यकारादेशो भव1त सौ परतः। There is a substitution of the letter ‘य’् in place of

the letter ‘e’ of ‘इदम’् when the affix ‘सँु’ follows.

Note: This rule only applies in the feminine because in the masculine the specific rule 7-2-

111 applies following which there is no letter ‘e’ left. In the neuter the affix ‘सँु’ takes the लुक्

elision by 7-1-23 following which no अEग-काय�म ्can be done as per 1-1-63.


इदम ्+ सँु 4-1-2 = इदम ्+ सँु 7-2-108 (Note: 7-2-108 prevents 7-2-102 from applying) = इयम ्+

सँु 7-2-110 = इयम1्-3-2, 6-1-68

260) 7-4-48 अपो Lभ

व�ृ": अप� तकारो भादौ ]Y यये। There is a substitution of the letter ‘त’् in place of the (ending letter)

of ‘अप’् when an affix beginning with the letter ‘भ’् follows.

उदाहरणम ्– अप ्+ Lभस ्4-1-2 = अत ्+ Lभस ्7-4-48 = अ1�: 8-2-39, 8-2-66, 8-3-15

261) (under 2-4-34) वा�"�कम ्– अ�वादेशे नपुंसक एनa�{यः ।

In अ�वादेश:, the इदम-्श}द: and एतe-श}द: in the neuter is substituted by ‘एनत’् when followed by

an affix of the second case or the affix ‘टा’ or ‘ओस’् ।

Note: This वा�"�कम ् has an effect only in the (aतीया-एकवचनम,् because in the remaining

places, 7-2-102(followed by 6-1-97) applies and it does not make a difference whether the

substitution is ‘एन’ or ‘एनत’्। ‘एन(द1त नपुसंक एकवचने व�{यम।्’ – महाभा�यम।्

उदाहरणम ् – इदम/्एतe (neuter) + अम ् (अ�वादेशे) 4-1-2 = इदम/्एतe 7-1-23 (Note: Here even

though 1-1-63 stops further अEग-काया�6ण after the लुक् elision of the affix अम,् since we have the

वा1त �कम ्prescribing the substitution ‘एनत’्, based on वचनसाम य�म,् we do the substitution) = एनत ्

by the वा�"�कम ्– अ�वादेशे नपुंसक एनa�{यः = एनe 8-2-39 = एनत ्/एनe 8-4-56

262) 8-2-69 रोऽसँु�प

62

व�ृ": अµ नो रेफादेशो न तु सँु�प । The letter ‘र’् is substituted for (the ending letter ‘न’् of) ‘अहन’्

when not followed by a सँुप ्affix.

Note: The negation introduced by using असँु�प in the सू�म ्should be taken as a ]स�य-]1तषेधः।


अहन ्+ सँु 4-1-2 = अहन ्7-1-23 = अहर ्8-2-69 = अहः 8-3-15

263) 8-2-68 अहन ्

व�ृ": अहि�नY य� य Sँ: पदा� ते । ‘Sँ’ is substituted for (the ending letter ‘न’् of) ‘अहन’्, when it has the

पद-सCDा।

उदाहरणम ्– अहन ्+ kयाम ्4-1-2 (अEगम ्gets the पद-सCDा by 1-4-17)= अहSँ + kयाम ्8-2-68 =

अहर ्+ kयाम ्1-3-2,1-3-4 = अह उ + kयाम ्6-1-114 = अहोkयाम ्6-1-87

264) (under 8-2-8) वा�"�कम ्स|बुFौ नपुंसकानां नलोपो वा वाrयः ।

When स|बु�Fः follows, the पदा�त-नकारः (the letter ‘न’् occurring at the end of a पदम)् of neuter

words is elided optionally.

उदाहरणम ्– (हे) दिnडन ्(neuter) + सँु (स|ब�ुFः) = दिnडन ्7-1-23 = दिnडन ्8-2-8 stops 8-2-7.

But, by the above वा1त �कम ्we get the optional form (हे) दिnड।

265) 7-1-79 वा नपुसंक�य

व�ृ": अk य� ताY परो यः शता तद� त� य � लIब� य वा नुँम ् सव�नाम� थाने । When followed by a

सव�नाम�थानम ्affix, a neuter stem ending in the affix ‘शतृँ’ which follows an अkय�तम,् takes the

नुँम ्augment optionally.

उदाहरणम ् – ददत ् (neuter) + जस ् /शस ्4-1-2 = ददत ् + Lश 7-1-20, 1-1-42 (Note: ‘दe’ has the

अkय�त-सCDा by 6-1-5) = दद नुँम ्त ्+ Lश 7-1-79, 1-1-47 = ददि�त 1-3-2, 1-3-3, 1-3-8 = ददं1त 8-3-

24 = ददि�त 8-4-58

or

ददत ्(neuter) + जस ्/शस ्4-1-2 = ददत ्+ Lश 7-1-20, 1-1-42 = दद1त 1-3-8

266) 7-1-80 आrछ¶नuोनु�म ्

व�ृ": अवणा�� तादEगाY परो यः शतुरवयव� तद� त� य नुँम ्वा शीनuोः । When a term (‘त’्) which is part of

the affix ‘शतृँ’ follows an अEगम ्ending in the अवण�: (the letter ‘अ’ or ‘आ’), then an अEगम ्ending

in such a term takes the नुँम ्augment optionally when the affix ‘शी’ or the feminine affix ‘ङI’

follows.

63

उदाहरणम ्– तदुत ्(neuter) + औ/औt 4-1-2 = तदुत ्+ शी 7-1-19 (Note: The अEगम ्(‘तुद’) for the शतृँ-

]Yययः ends in the अवण�: (in this case an अकारः)) = तदु नुँम ्त ्+ शी 7-1-80, 1-1-47 = तुद�ती 1-3-

2, 1-3-3, 1-3-8 = तुदंती 8-3-24 = तुद�ती 8-4-58

or

तदुत ्(neuter) + औ/औt 4-1-2 = तुदत ्+ शी 7-1-19 = तदुती 1-3-8

267) 7-1-81 शXpयनो1न�Yयम ्

व�ृ": शX p यनोराY परो यः शतरुवयव� तद� त� य 1नY य ंनुँम ्शीनuोः । When a term (‘त’्) which is part of

the affix ‘शतृँ’ follows a अवण�: (the letter ‘अ’ or ‘आ’) belonging to the affix ‘शप’्/’pयन’्, then an

अEगम ्ending in such a term always takes the नुँम ्augment when the affix ‘शी’ or the feminine

affix ‘ङI’ follows.

उदाहरणम ्– पचत ्(neuter) + औ/औt 4-1-2 = पचत ्+ शी 7-1-19 (Note: The अEगम ्(‘पच’) for the शतृँ-

]Yययः ends in the अवण�: (in this case an अकारः) of the शप-्]Yयय:) = पच नुँम ्त ्+ शी 7-1-81, 1-

1-47 = पच�ती 1-3-2, 1-3-3, 1-3-8= पचतंी 8-3-24 = पच�ती 8-4-58

Similarly दI{यत ्(neuter) + औ/औt 4-1-2 = दI{य�ती।

268) 1-1-37 �वरा(द1नपातम{ययम ्

व�ृ"ः � वरादयो 1नपाताp चा{ ययसंDाः � युः । The class of terms beginning with �वर ्(heaven) and the

particles (1नपाताः) are assigned the name अ{ययम ्(indeclinable).

The following are listed under the �वरा(द-गणः in the गण-पाठः। (The important ones are followed

by an asterisk. For meanings, please refer to Apte’s dictionary.)

सवर*्, अ�तर*्, ]ातर*्, पनुर*्, सनुतर,् उrचैस*्, नीचैस*्, शनैस*्, ऋधक्, ऋते*, युगपत*्, आरात*्, पथृक्*,

fस*्, Qस*्, (दवा*, रा�ौ, सायम*्, �चरम*्, मनाक्*, ईषत*्, जोषम*्, तू�णीम*्, ब(हस*्, अवस,् अधस*्, समया*,

1नकषा*, �वयम*्, वथृा*, न�म*्, नञ*्, न*, हेतौ, इFा, अFा, साLम*, वत*्, सना, सनत,् सनात,् उपधा, 1तरस*्,

अ�तरा*, अ�तरेण*, �योक्, कम,् शम*्, सहसा*, �वना*, नाना*, �वि�त*, �वधा, अलम*्, वषt, �ौषt, वौषt,

अ�यत,् अि�त, उपांशु, Mमा, �वहायसा, दोषा, मषृा*, Lम या*, मुधा, पुरा*, Lमथो, Lमथस*्, ]ायस*्, मुहुस*्,

]वाहुकम,् ]वा(हका, आय�हलम,् अभीMणम*्, साकम*्, साध�म*्, नमस*्, (हSक्, �धक्*, अथ*, अम,् आम,् ]ताम,्

]शान,् मा*, माE*

The list of words enumerated in the �वरा(द-गणः is not exhaustive. The गण: is what is called as

an ‘आकृ1त-गण:’ – which is a class or group of words in which some words are actually mentioned

and room is left to include others which are found undergoing the same operations. Other such

words that are accepted in usage (Lश4-]योगः) and grammatically behave like an अ{ययम ्can be

enlisted in the �वरा(द-गणः। Some important words that are counted in this आकृ1तगणः are as

follows:

समम*्, स�ा*, झ(ट1त*, तरसा*, �ाक्*, अCजसा*, मEM,ु सप(द*, भूयस*्, कामम*्, संवत*्, ब(द*, शु(द*,

64

साMात*्, सा�च, अज�म*्, अ1नशम*्, वरम*्, �थाने*, कृतम*्, ]ादसु*्, आ�वस*्, ]कामम*्, उषा, ओम*्,

अवpयम*्, स|]1त*, सा|]तम*्, सुxु*, दxुु*, Lमथु/Lमथुर,् असा|]तम*्, कु*, सु*, �चरेण*, �चराय*, �चररा�ाय,

�चरात*्, �चर�य, �चरे।

By 1-1-37, a 1नपात: gets अ{यय-सCDा। 1नपाता: are listed in the अ�धकार: of 1-4-

56 ]ाPीQराि�नपाताः which goes up to 1-4-97 अ�धरIQरे।

1-4-57 चादयोऽसhवे and 1-4-58 ]ादयः list the class of terms चादयः and ]ादय:। These will get the

1नपात-सCDा by1-4-56.

The following come under चा(द-गणः

च*, वा*, ह, अह, एव*, एवम*्, नूनम*्, शQत*्, युगपत*्, भूयस*्, कूपत,् सूपत,् कु�वत,् नेत,् चेत*्, चण,् य�*,

किrचत*्, नह, ह�त*, माwकर,् माक¸म,् नwकर,् नक¸म,् माE*, नञ,् यावत*्, तावत*्, Yव,ै �व,ै aै, रै, �ौषt, वौषt,

�वाहा, �वधा, वषt, तुम,् तथा(ह*, खलु*, wकल*, अथो, अथ*, सुxु*, �म*, आदह।

उपसग�-�वभ��-�वर-]1तOपकाT। (गण-सू�म)् Words which mimic a उपसग�: or a word ending in a

�वभ��: or a vowel, are also included in this class. Examples are as follows:

अवद"म,् अहंयुः, अि�तMीरा, अ, आ, इ, ई, उ, ऊ, ए, ऐ, ओ, औ।

The remaining part of the चा(द-गणः is as follows:

पशु, शुकम,् यथाकथाच, पाट, Xयाt, अEग*, है, हे*, भोस*्, अये*, u, �वष,ु एकपदे*, यतु,् आतस।्

The चा(द-गणः is also an आकृ1त-गणः। The following can be included under चा(द-गणः।

अ1य*, रे*, अरे, अरेरे, भगोस,् अघोस,् हंहो, हा*, अहह, अहो*, सह*, जातु*, इत,् नो*, नोचेत*्, न(ह*, उत*,

wकम*्, wकमुत*, wकमु*, wकLम1त*, wकLमव*, wकम�प*, ]Yयुत*, अकाnड*े, �चत*्, चन*, अमा, आहो*, उताहो*,

ि�वत,् आहोि�वत*्, अतीव*, बत*, अuा�प*, ]भ1ृत*, तु*, ननु*, (ह*, नाम*, इव*, इ1त*, (द¹या*, नु*, यe*,

तe*, यद�प, ते, मे, मम, वाम,् अ�त,ु नाि�त, येन, तेन, अक�मात*्, ]सf*, अºाय, व, सम�तात*्, भवत,ु

बलवत,् तद�प, य�मात,् त�मात,् आः, हI, वै*, wकCच*, य(द*, यu�प*, यaा*, य(द वा*, अथवा*, वारं वारम*्,

]ेYय, पुरतः*, ]ायेण*, ]ायशः*, व�ततुः*, अथ wकम*्, अ�वक्, अ�प वा*, क�मात*्, ]गे, परQः, �ाक्, अरम,्

रहः, उपजोषम,् अuYवे, तदनु।

269) 1-4-58 ]ादयः

व�ृ"ः ]ाऽदयो ऽसhवे 1नपतसंDा भवि�त। The class of terms beginning with ‘]’ get the name 1नपात:

as long as they don’t convey the sense of a physical thing.

The following come under ]ा(द-गणः

] । परा । अप । सम ्। अनु । अव । 1नस ्। 1नर ्। दसु ्। दरु ्। �व । आE । 1न । अ�ध । अ�प ।

अ1त । सु । उe । अLभ । ]1त । पjर । उप ।

When these ]ादय: are used in conjunction with verbs they get the उपसग�-सCDा by the following

rule.

65

Some of these may also be used without a connection with a verb – for example -


आ»¼भुवनात ्meaning ‘up to the realm of Brahma.’

270) 1-4-59 उपसगा�ः w:यायोगे

व�ृ"ः ]ादयः w:यायोगे उपसग�सCDा: � युः । When used in conjunction with a verb, the terms ‘]’ etc.

get the उपसग�-सCDा।


यं ]ाXय न 1नवत��ते। ‘Having reached which (they) don’t return.’ Here the term ‘1न’ which is listed

in the ]ा(दगण:, is used in conjunction with the verb ‘वत��ते’। Hence it gets the उपसग�-सCDा। (It

also retains the 1नपात-सCDा and the अ{यय-सCDा)।

271) 1-1-38 त�FतTासव��वभ��ः

व�ृ"ः य�मात ्सवा� �वभ��न\Yपuते स त�Fता�तोऽ{यय ं�यात ्। The words ending in a त�Fत-]Yयय:,

after which it is not possible to introduce all of the सँुप-्affixes, are also designated as

indeclinables.

The त�Fत-]Yयया: are listed in the ‘4-1-76 त�Fताः’ अ�धकारः। This अ�धकार: runs up to the end of

the Fifth Chapter of the अ4ा_यायी।

If we follow the strict meaning of this सू�म,् there will be some situations where a term ends in a

त�Fत-]Yयय: and does not take all the case endings, but still does not get the अ{यय-सCDा। For

example ‘उभय’ ends in a त�Fत-]Yयय: and it is declined only in the singular and plural, not in the

dual. So it would qualify for the अ{यय-सCDा as per this सू�म,् but this is not desirable – because

that would mean that the case endings would take the लुक् elision as per 2-4-82.

In order to avoid this problem, the grammarians have concluded that a listing has to be done

(पjरगणनं कत�{यम)् of those त�Fत-]Yयया: which can create an अ{ययम।्

The listing includes six categories as follows:

1st category – तLसलादयः ]ाक् पाशपः – The affixes prescribed in the सू�ा6ण from 5-3-

7 पCच|या�तLसल ्up to (but not including) 5-3-47 याXये पाशप ्।

Some of the important ]Yयया: in this section are as follows:

66

i) तLसँल-्]Yययः – 5-3-7 पCच|या�तLसल,् 5-3-9 पय�Lभkयां च ।

उदाहरणा1न – इतः, ततः, अतः, कुतः, यतः, सव�तः, अ�यतः, पjरतः, अLभतः, उभयतः।

ii) �ल-्]Yययः – 5-3-10 स`|या�ल।्

उदाहरणा1न – सव��, कु�, अ�य�, अ�, य�, एक�, अमु�, बहु�।

iii) ह-]Yययः 5-3-11 इदमो हः।

उदाहरणम ्– इह।

iv) अत-्]Yययः 5-3-12 wकमोऽत।्

उदाहरणम ्– �व।

v) दा-]Yययः 5-3-15 सव�का�यwकंय"दः काले दा।

उदाहरणा1न – सव�दा, सदा, एकदा, अ�यदा, कदा, यदा, तदा।

vi) (ह�ल-्]Yययः 5-3-16 इदमो (ह�ल,् 5-3-21 अनuतने (ह�ल�यतर�याम।्

उदाहरणा1न – एत(ह�, क(ह�, य(ह�।

vii) धुना-]Yययः 5-3-17 अधुना।

उदाहरणम ्– अधनुा।

viii) दानीम-्]Yययः 5-3-18 दानीं च, 5-3-19 तदो दा च।

उदाहरणे – इदानीम,् तदानीम।्

ix) (सuस-्आदय: श}दा: 1नपाYय�ते) 5-3-22

सuःपSYपराय�षमःपरेu{यuपूवHuुर�येuुर�यतरेuुjरतरेuुरपरेuुरधरेuुSभयेuुS"रेuुः।

उदाहरणा1न – सuः, पSत,् अu, पूवHuुः, अ�येuुः, इतरेuुः, उ"रेuुः।

x) थाल-्]Yययः 5-3-23 ]कारवचने थाल।्

उदाहरणा1न – यथा, तथा, सव�था, अ�यथा, उभयथा।

xi) थमँु-]Yययः 5-3-24 इदम�थमुः, 5-3-25 wकमT।

उदाहरणा1न – इYथम,् कथम।्

xii) अ�ता1तँ-]Yययः 5-3-27 (दक् श}देkयः स`मीपCचमी]थमाkयो (द�देशकाले�व�ता1तः।

उदाहरणे – पुर�तात,् अध�तात।्

xiii) अतसँुच-्]Yययः 5-3-28 द¢Mणो"राkयामतसुच,् 5-3-29 �वभाषा परावराkयाम ्

दाहरणा1न – द¢Mणतः, उ"रतः, परतः।


परत:।

xiv) अ�तातेलु�क्-]Yययः 5-3-30 अCचेलु�क्।

उदाहरणे – ]ाक्, ]Yयक्।

xv) (jरल,् jर4ात)् 5-3-31 उपयु�पjर4ात ्।

67

उदाहरणे – उपjर, उपjर4ात।्

xvi) आ1त-]Yययः 5-3-32 पTात ्।

उदाहरणम ्– पTात।्

xvii) अLसँ-]Yययः 5-3-39 पूवा�धरावराणामLस पुरधवTैषाम ्।

उदाहरणे – पुरः, अधः।

xvii) धा-]Yययः 5-3-42 सं>याया �वधाऽथH धा।

उदाहरणा1न – एकधा, (aधा, ^�धा, चतुधा�, पCचधा, ष�धा, षोढा, स`धा, अ4धा, नवधा।


अ4धा।

xviii) एधाच-्]Yययः 5-3-46 एधाrच।

उदाहरणे – aेधा, �धेा।

2nd category: श�]भतृयः ]ाक् समासा�तेkयः। From शस-्]Yययः up to (but not including) समासा�ता:।

That is from 5-4-42 to 5-4-67.

Some of the important ]Yयया: in this section are as follows:

i) शस-्]Yययः – 5-4-42 बq[पाथा�rछस ्कारकाद�यतर�याम।्

उदाहरणे – बहुशः, अ[पशः।

5-4-43 सं>यकैवचनाrच वीXसायाम।्

उदाहरणा1न – एकशः, (aशः, ^�शः, शतशः, सह�श:।


शतश:, सह�श:।

ii) तLसँ – वा1त �कम ्(under 5-4-44) आuा(दkय उपसं>यानम।् (साव��वभ��क: तLस:)।

उदाहरणा1न – आ(दतः, म_यतः, Dानतः, वीय�तः, नामतः।

iii) िrव ँ– 5-4-50 अभूतत�ावे कृkवि�तयोगे स|पuकत�jर िrवः।

उदाहरणे – शु�लI करो1त, �प4ी-करणम।्

iv) सा1तँ – 5-4-52 �वभाषा सा1त काY��यH।


भ�मसात।्

3rd category: अम-्]Yयय:, आम-्]Yयय:।

i) अमँु-]Yययः 5-4-12 अमु च rछ�दLस। Used only in the वेद:।

68

ii) आमँु-]Yययः 5-4-11 wकमे�"ङ{ययघादा|व�{य]कषH।

उदाहरणा1न – पच1ततराम,् पच1ततमाम,् उrचै�तराम,् उrचै�तमाम,् सुतराम,् 1नतराम।्

4th category: कृYवोऽथा�ः। The कृYवसँुच-्]Yयय: and other ]Yयया: that are used in the same meaning

as कृYवसँुच।् From 5-4-17 to 5-4-20.

i) कृYवसँुच ्– 5-4-17 सं>यायाः w:याऽkयाव�ृ"गणने कृYवसुच ्।

उदाहरणे – पCचकृYवः, स`कृYवः


सह�कृYवः।

ii) सँुच ्– 5-4-18 (a^�चतkुय�ः सुच ्।

उदाहरणा1न – (aस,् ^�स,् चतसु।्

iii) सँुच ्-5-4-19 एक�य सकृrच

उदाहरणम ्– सकृत।्

5th category: तLसँ-]Yयय: (4-3-112, 4-3-113), व1तँ-]Yयय: (5-1-115, 5-1-116, 5-1-117)।

For example -

i) व1तँ – 5-1-115 तेन त[ुय ंw:या चेa1तः ।

उदाहरणम ्– »ा¼णवत।्

6th category: ना-]Yयय:, नाञ-्]Yयय:।

i) ना, नाञ ्– 5-2-27 �वनCkयां नानाञौ न सह।

उदाहरणे – �वना, नाना।

272) 1-1-39 कृ�मेज�तः

व�ृ"ः कृuो मा� त एज� तp च तद� तम{ यय ं� यात ्। A term ending in a कृत ्affix ending in the letter ‘म’्

or एच ्(‘ए’, ‘ओ’, ‘ऐ’, ‘औ’) is also designated as an indeclinable.

Among the कृत ्affixes only णमँुल,् कमँुल,् खमँुञ ्and तुमँुन ्end in the letter ‘म’्। Out of these the

most common is the तुमँुन ्affix.

The कृत ्affixes that end in एच ्are used only in the वेद:।

Since these are कृद�ताः, they get the ]ा1तप(दकम ्सCDा by 1-2-46 कृ"�FतसमासाT, and the सँुप ्

affixes take लुक् elision by 2-4-82 अ{ययादाXसुपः ।

उदाहरणम ् -

i) तुमँुन ्– प(ठतुम ्(तुमँुन ्affix by 3-3-10 तुमु�nवुलौ w:यायां w:याथा�याम ्)।


69

�4ुम।् (तुमँुन ्affix by 3-3-158 समानकतृ�केषु तुमुन)्


�4ुम।् (तुमँुन ्affix by 3-4-65 शकधषृDा�लाघटरभलभ:मसहाहा��YयथHष ुतुमुन)्

273) 1-1-40 �Yवातोसु�कसुनः

व�ृ"ः �Yवा तोसुन ्कसुन ्इYयेवम�तं श}दOपम{ययसंDं भव1त। Words ending in the affixes ‘�Yवा’,

‘तोसुन’् and ‘कसुन’् are designated as indeclinables.

The तोसँुन-्]Yयय: and कसँुन-्]Yयय: is used only in the वेद:।

उदाहरणा1न for �Yवा-]Yयय: – �ुYवा, DाYवा, भूYवा।

�Yवा-]Yयय: is prescribed by 3-4-21 समानकतृ�कयोः पवू�काले।


यBYवा न 1नवत��ते।

274) 1-1-41 अ{ययीभावT

व�ृ"ः अ{ययीभावसमासोऽ{ययसंDो भव1त। The compounds that are अ{ययीभाव-समासाः are also

designated as indeclinables.

Note: The rules for forming अ{ययीभाव-समासाः are from 2-1-5 to 2-1-21.

उदाहरणम ्– यथाश��

274) 2-4-82 अ{ययादाXसुपः

व�ृ"ः अ{ यया(a(हत� यापः सुपp च लुक् । The feminine affix आप ्and सँुप ्affixes that are prescribed

after an अ{ययम ्take the लुक् elision.

स3शं ^�ष ुLलEगेषु सवा�सु च �वभ��षु।

वचनेषु च सवHषु य�न {ये1त तद{ययम॥्

Very good reference book for the अ{यय-]करणम ्is the ‘अ{ययकोश:’ published by the Sanskrit

Education Society in Chennai.

275) 1-3-1 भूवादयो धातवः

व�ृ"ः w:यावा�चनो k वादयो धातुसCDा: � यःु । The terms ‘भू’ etc. denoting action get the धात-ुसCDा।

(They are called ‘verbal roots.’)

70

These are enumerated in a list called the धात-ुपाठ:।

The following terminations (which can be added to a धातु:) denoting the tenses and moods of the

verbs are called the ten लकाराः – लँt, Lलँt, लँुt, लृँt, ल½t, ल¾t, लँE, LलँE, लँुE, लृँE ।

Out of these ल½t is used only in the वेद:।

So, in भाषायाम ्(classical Sanskrit) only लँट, Lलँt, लँुt, लृँt, ल¾t, लँE, LलँE, लँुE, लृँE are used. LलँE

has two varieties �व�धLलँE and आशीLल¿E। Taking this two-fold distinction of LलँE into account, in

भाषायाम ्also there are ten लकारा:।

276) 3-4-69 लः कम�6ण च भावे चाकम�केkयः

व�ृ"ः लकाराः सकम�केk यः कम�6ण कत�jर च � युरकम�केk यो भावे कत�jर च । The लकाराः (tense-affixes)

may be used after a सकम�क-धातुः (transitive verb) in denoting the object as well as the agent; and

when they come after an intransitive verb (अकम�क-धातःु) they may denote the action as well as

the agent.

In active voice the लकारः affix marks the agent (कतृ�वाrय:)। In passive voice of a सकम�क-धातःु the

लकारः affix marks the object (कम�वाrय:)। And for the passive voice of a अकम�क-धातुः the लकारः

affix marks the action itself (भाववाrय:)।

उदाहरणम ्-

पुSषो वMृं 1छन�" । (सकम�क-धातुः, कतृ�वाrय:)

पुSषेण घटः w:यते । (सकम�क-धातुः, कम�वाrय:)

बालः 1तx1त । (अकम�क-धातुः, कतृ�वाrय:)

बालेन �थीयते । (अकम�क-धातःु, भाववाrय:)

277) 3-2-123 वत�माने लt

व�ृ"ः वत�मानw:याव"ेृधा�तोल�t � यात ्। The affix लँt comes after a धातुः when denoting an action in

the present tense.

278) 1त`ि�झLसXथ�थLम}व�मस ्तातांझथासाथां_वLम�व(हम(हE 3-4-78

व�ृ"ः एतेऽ� टादश लादेशाः � युः। These 18 affixes are the substitutes for the लकारः।

279) 1-4-99 लः पर�मैपदम ्

व�ृ"ः लादेशाः पर� मैपदसCDाः � युः। The substitutes for the लकारः get the पर� मैपद-सCDा।

280) 1-4-100 तङानावाYमनेपदम ्

71

व�ृ"ः तE-]Y याहारः शानr कानचौ चतैY सCDाः � युः। The affixes of the तE-]Yयाहारः (which comprises

of त, आताम,् झ, थास,् आथाम,् _वम,् इt, व(ह, म(हE), the शानच-्]Yययः and the कानच-्]Yययः get the

आYमनेपद-सCDा।

281) 1-3-12 अनुदा"�ङत आYमनेपदम ्

व�ृ"ः अनुदा"ेतो �ङतp च धातोराY मनेपदं � यात।् The आYमनेपद-]Yयया: follow a धातःु which is

distinguished in the धात-ुपाठः by an इत ्that has the अनदुा"-�वर: or has ङकारः as an इत।्

282) 1-3-72 �वjरत�ञतः क��Lभ]ाये w:याफले

व�ृ"ः � वjरतेतो �ञतp च धातोराY मनेपदं � याY कतृ�गाLम1न w:याफले । When the fruit of the action

accrues to the agent (कता�), the आYमनेपद-]Yयया: follow the धातुः which is distinguished in the

धात-ुपाठः by an इत ्that has the �वjरत-�वर: or by ञकारः as an इत।्

283) 1-3-78 शेषात ्कत�jर पर�मैपदम ्

व�ृ"ः आY मनेपद1नLम"हIनाFातोः कत�jर पर� मैपदं � यात।् When used in the active voice, a verbal root

takes a पर�मैपदम ्affix provided it does not satisfy any of the conditions (listed in the rules

from 1-3-12 to 1-3-77) required for taking a आYमनेपदम ्affix.

284) 1-4-101 1तङ�ी6ण �ी6ण ]थमम_यमो"माः

व�ृ"ः 1तङ उभयोः पदयो�यि�का: :मादेतY सCDाः � युः। Of the 18 conjugational affixes of the 1तE-

]Yयाहारः, there are 3 triads in both the sets (set of पर�मैपद-]Yयया: and आYमनेपद-]Yयया:)। In

each set, each of the triads correspond to ]थम-पुSषः (3rd person), म_यम-पुSषः (2nd person) and

उ"म-पुSषः (1st person) respectively.

285) 1-4-102 ता�येकवचन(aवचनबहुवचना�येकशः

व�ृ"ः ल} ध]थमा(दसCDा1न 1तङ� �ी6ण �ी6ण वचना1न ]Y येकमेकवचना(दसCDा1न � यःु । Each of the six

triads formed by 1-4-101, is divided, according to number, into three classes, viz., एकवचनम ्

(singular), (aवचनम ्(dual), and बहुवचनम ्(plural).

286) 1-4-105 यु�मuुपपदे समाना�धकरणे �था1न�य�प म_यमः

व�ृ"ः 1तEवाr यकारकवा�च1न यु� म(द (उपपदे) ]यु� यमानेऽ]यु� यमाने च म_ यमः। When the यु�मe-श}दः

(either implied or expressed) is the word that is in agreement with the verb, a म_यम-पुSष-]Yयय:

is used.

गीतासु उदाहरणम ्-

त�मादेवं �व(दYवनैं नानुशो�चतुमह�Lस ।।2-25।। 1तङ�त-पदम ् is अह�Lस। Here Yवम ्(यु�मe-]ा1तप(दकम,्

]थमा-एकवचनम)् is implied.

72

तथा�प Yवं महाबाहो नवैं शो�चतुमह�Lस ।। 2-26।। 1तङ�त-पदम ्is अह�Lस। Here Yवम ्(यु�मe-]ा1तप(दकम,्

]थमा-एकवचनम)् is expressed.

287) 1-4-107 अ�मuु"मः

व�ृ"ः 1तEवाr यकारकवा�च1न अ�म(द (उपपदे) ]यु� यमानेऽ]यु� यमाने च म_ यमः। When the अ�मe-श}दः

(either implied or expressed) is the word that is in agreement with the verb, a उ"म-पुSष-]Yयय: is

used.


पjर�ाणाय साधूनां �वनाशाय च द�ुकृताम ् ।

धम�सं�थापनाथा�य स|भवाLम युगे युगे ।। 4-8।। 1तङ�त-पदम ् is स|भवाLम। Here अहम ् (अ�मe-

]ा1तप(दकम,् ]थमा-एकवचनम)् is implied.

यावदेताि�नरIMेऽहं योFुकामानवि�थतान ् ।

कैम�या सह योF{यमि�मन ् रणसमुuमे ।।1-22।। 1तङ�त-पदम ्is 1नरIMे। Here अहम ्(अ�मe-]ा1तप(दकम,्

]थमा-एकवचनम)् is expressed.

288) 1-4-108 शेषे ]थमः

व�ृ"ः शेषः इ1त म_यमो"म�वषयात ्अ�यः उrयते । In all the other instances – when neither the

यु�मe-श}दः nor the अ�मe-श}दः is in agreement with the verb – a ]थम-पSुष-]Yयय: is used.

The following table shows the classification of the 1तE-affixes:

पर�मैपद-]Yययाः आYमनेपद-]Yययाः पुSषः

]थम-^�क: 1तप,् तस,् 6झ त, आताम,् झ ]थम-पुSषः

(aतीय-^�क: Lसप,् थस,् थ थास,् आथाम,् _वम ्म_यम-पSुषः

ततृीय-^�क: Lमप,् वस,् मस ्इt, व(ह, म(हE उ"म-पSुषः

The following सू�म ्defines the साव�धातकु-सCDा।

289) 3-4-113 1तELशYसाव�धातुकम ्

व�ृ"ः 1तङः LशतT धाYव�धकारो�ा एतYसंDाः �युः। The affixes of the 1तE-]Yयाहारः and the affixes

that have शकारः as an इत ्get the designation of साव�धातुकम ्if they are prescribed in the ‘धातो:’

अ�धकार:।

गीतासु उदाहरणम ्verse 4-7

भव1त – धातु: ‘भू’ (भू स"ायाम)्

The �ववMा here is वत�मान-काले, ]थम-पुSष-एकवचनम,् कत�jर ]योग:।

भू + लँt 3-4-69, 3-2-123 = भू + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3 = भू + 1तप ्3-4-78. 1तप ्gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-

4-113

73

Continued below.

290) 3-1-68 कत�jर शप ्

व�ृ"ः क��थH साव�धातकेु परे धातोः शप ्। The शप-्]Yयय: is placed after a verbal root, when followed

by a साव�धातकु-]Yयय: that is used signifying the agent.

Example continued from above:

भू + शप ्+ 1तप ्। 3-1-68

Continued below.

291) 1-1-3 इको गुणवFृी

व�ृ"ः गुणव�ृFश}दाkयां य� गुणवFृी �वधीयेते त�के इ1त ष°य�त ंपदमुप1तxते। When a गुणः or व�ृF:

substitution is prescribed (without specifying the �थानी – the term to be substituted) using the

term ‘गुण’ or ‘व�ृF’, then it should be understood to be in place of a इक् letter only.

292) 7-3-84 साव�धातकुाध�धातुकयोः

व�ृ"ः अनयोः परयोjरग� ताEग� य गुणः। A अEगम ्whose final letter is a इक् gets a ‘गुण’ letter (ref. 1-

1-2 अदेE गुणः) as a substitute, when a ‘साव�धातुक’ affix or a ‘आध�धातुक’ affix follows.

Example continued from above

The अEगम ्‘भू’ is followed by शप-्]Yयय: which is a Lशत।् It gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113.

भो + शप ्+ 1तप ्7-3-84, 1-1-3, 1-1-52 = भो + अ + 1त 1-3-3, 1-3-8 = भव1त 6-1-78

293) 7-1-3 झोऽ�तः

व�ृ"ः ]Y ययावयव� य झ� या� तादेशः । ‘अ�त’् comes in as a replacement for the झकारः of a ]Yयय:।

गीतासु उदाहरणम ्– अ�ना�वि�त भूता1न v3-14

भवि�त – धातु: ‘भू’ (भू स"ायाम)्

The �ववMा here is वत�मान-काले, ]थम-पुSष-बहुवचनम,् कत�jर ]योग:।

भू + लँt 3-4-69, 3-2-123 = भू + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= भू + 6झ 3-4-78, 6झ gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= भू + शप ्+ 6झ 3-1-68, शप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113 = भो + शप ्+ 6झ 7-3-84

= भो + अ + 6झ 1-3-3, 1-3-8 = भव + 6झ 6-1-78 = भव + अ�त ्इ 7-1-3 = भवि�त 6-1-97

294) 7-3-101 अतो दIघ\ य�ञ

व�ृ"ः अतोऽEग� य दIघ\ यञादौ साव�धातकेु । The ending letter ‘अ’ of a अEगम ्is elongated if it is

followed by a साव�धातकुम ्affix beginning with a letter of the यञ-्]Yयाहार:।

74


तेषामहं समुFता� मYृयुसंसारसागरात ् |

भवाLम न�चराYपाथ� म�यावेLशतचेतसाम ् || 12-7||

भवाLम – धातु: ‘भू’ (भू स"ायाम)्

The �ववMा here is वत�मान-काले, उ"म-पुSष-एकवचनम,् कत�jर ]योग:।

भू + लँt 3-4-69, 3-2-123 = भू + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3 = भू + Lमप ्3-4-78. Lमप ् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा

by 3-4-113

= भू + शप ् + Lमप ्3-1-68, शप ् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113 = भो + शप ् + Lमप ्7-3-84

= भो + अ + Lम 1-3-3, 1-3-8 = भव + Lम 6-1-78 = भवाLम 7-3-101

295) 3-3-162 लोt च

व�ृ"ः �व_ याuथHषु धातोल\t। The affix ल¾t follows a धातुः when used in the sense of

command/request.

गीतासु उदाहरणम ्– म�मना भव म��ो मuाजी मां नम�कुS ॥ ९-३४॥

296) 3-3-173 आLश�ष LलEलोटौ

व�ृ"ः आशी�व�Lश4ेऽथH वत�मानाe धातोLल�ELलटौ ]Yययौ भवतः। The affixes LलE and ल¾t follow a धातःु

when used in the sense of benediction.

उदाहरणे – पु��ते भवेत।् पु��ते भवतु/भवतात।्

भवेत ्(�व�ध-LलँE, ]थम-पSुषः, एकवचनम)्, भवतु/भवतात ्(आशीलÀt, ]थम-पुSषः, एकवचनम)्

297) 3-4-86 एSः

व�ृ"ः लोट इकार� य उः । इकारः of a ल¾t is substituted by उकारः |

उदाहरणम ्– भवत ु(√भू-धातुः, ल¾t, ]थम-पSुषः, एकवचनम)्

भू + ल¾t 3-3-162 = भू + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= भू + 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= भू + 1त 1-3-3 = भू + त ु3-4-86

= भू + शप ्+ त ु3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= भो + शप ्+ त ु7-3-84 = भो + अ + त ु1-3-3, 1-3-8 = भवत ु6-1-78

298) 7-1-35 तुfो�तातEङाLश�य�यतर�याम ्

व�ृ"ः आLश�ष तुµ यो� तातE वा । When used in the sense of benediction, ‘तातE’ is optionally

substituted for ‘तु’ and ‘(ह’।

उदाहरणम ्– भवतात ्(√भू-धातुः, आशीलÀt, ]थम-पुSषः, एकवचनम)्

75

भू + आशीलÀt 3-3-173 = भू + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3


= भू + 1त 1-3-3 = भू + त ु3-4-86

= भू + शप ्+ त ु3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= भो + शप ्+ त ु7-3-84 = भो + अ + त ु1-3-3, 1-3-8 = भवत ु6-1-78

Optionally तु gets तातE-आदेशः to give the form भवतात ्7-1-35, 1-1-55, 1-3-3

Note: In the तातE-आदेशः, the अकारः before the ङकारः is उrचारणाथ�म।्

299) 3-4-85 लोटो लEवत ्

व�ृ"ः लोटो लEवत ्काय� भव1त । तामादयः सलोपT । ल¾t is treated like लँE, and hence the following

two operations take place in the case of ल¾t as they do in the case of लँE -

i) the substitution by ताम ्etc. (ref 3-4-101) and ii) the elision of सकारः (ref 3-4-99).

300) 1-3-10 यथासं>यमनदेुशः समानाम ्

व�ृ"ः समसंब� धी �व�धय�थासं> य ं� यात ्। The assignment of equally enumerated items follows the

order of their enumeration.

301) 3-4-101 त�थ�थLमपां तातंतंामः

व�ृ"ः �ङतp चतुणा� तामादयः :माY � युः। The 1तE-]Yययाः ‘तस’्, ‘थस’्, ‘थ’ and ‘Lमप’् of a लकारः which is

a �ङत,् are replaced by ‘ताम’्, ‘तम’्, ‘त’ and ‘अम’् respectively.

उदाहरणम ् – भवताम ् (√भू-धातुः, ल¾t, ]थम-पSुषः, (aवचनम)्

भू + ल¾t 3-3-162 = भू + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= भू + तस ्1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, तस ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= भू + ताम ्3-4-85, 3-4-101, 1-3-10, ताम ्also gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 1-1-56

= भू + शप ्+ ताम ्3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= भो + शप ्+ ताम ्7-3-84 = भो + अ + ताम ्1-3-3, 1-3-8, 1-3-4 = भवताम ्6-1-78

302) 3-4-87 सेf��पrच

व�ृ"ः लोटः से(ह�ः सोऽ�पr च । ‘Lस’ of ल¾t is substituted by ‘(ह’ and it is an अ�पत।्

Note: अ�पत ्is that which does not have पकारः as इत।्

गीतासु उदाहरणम ्– कLम�kयTा�धको योगी त�माuोगी भवाजु�न || 6-46||

भव (√भू-धातुः, ल¾t, म_यम-पुSषः, एकवचनम)्

भू + ल¾t 3-3-162 = भू + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= भू + Lसप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-105, Lसप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= भू + Lस 1-3-3 = भू + (ह 3-4-87, (ह also gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 1-1-56

76

= भू + शप ्+ (ह 3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113 = भो + शप ्+ (ह 7-

3-84 = भो + अ + (ह1-3-3, 1-3-8 =भव(ह 6-1-78

Example continued below

303) 6-4-105 अतो हेः

व�ृ"ः अतः पर� य हेलु�क् । There is an elision of the affix ‘(ह’ when it follows an अEगम ्ending in a

अकार:।


भव(ह = भव 6-4-105

304) 3-4-89 मे1न�ः

व�ृ"ः लोटो मे1न�ः � यात ्। The affix ‘Lम’ of ल¾t is substituted by ‘1न’।

उदाहरणम ्– भवा1न (√भू-धातुः, ल¾t, उ"म-पुSषः, एकवचनम)्

भू + ल¾t 3-3-162 = भू + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= भू + Lमप ्3-4-78, 3-4-101, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-107, Lमप ् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= भू + Lम 1-3-3 = भू + 1न 3-4-89, 1न also gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 1-1-56

Continued below

305) 3-4-92 आडु"म�य �पrच

व�ृ"ः ल¾डु"म� याt � यात ्�पr च । A उ"म-पुSष-]Yययः of ल¾t gets आt as an augment. And this

उ"म-पुSष-]Yययः is considered to have पकारः as इत।्

Note: (ह� योSY वं न, इकारोr चारण-साम या�त।् By उrचारणसाम या�त,् the ending इकारः of (ह and 1न do

not get उकारः as आदेशः by 3-4-87 एSः।


भू + 1न = भू + आt 1न 3-4-92, 1-1-46 = भू आ1न 1-3-3

= भू + शप ्+ आ1न 3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113 = भो + शप ्+

आ1न 7-3-84 = भो + अ + आ1न 1-3-3, 1-3-8 = भव + आ1न 6-1-78 = भवा1न 6-1-101

306) 1-4-80 ते ]ा�धातोः

व�ृ"ः ते गY युपसग�संDका धातोः ]ागेव ]यो�{ याः । The particles having ग1त-सCDा or उपसग�-सCDा

are placed before the धातःु, i.e. used as prefixes.

307) 8-4-16 आ1न लोt

77

व�ृ"ः उपसग�Lसथाि�नLम"ाY पर� य लोडादेश� यानीY य� य न� य णः � यात ्। The नकारः of the ल¾t affix

आ1न gets णकारः as a replacement, when the 1नLम"म ्(cause – रेफः, षकारः, ऋवण�ः) that brings

about the णYवम ्is present in the उपसग�ः।

उदाहरणम ्– ]भवा6ण (√भू-धातुः, ]-उपसग�ः, ल¾t, उ"म-पुSषः, एकवचनम)्

] + भवा1न = ]भवा6ण 8-4-16

308) 3-4-99 1नYयं �ङतः

व�ृ"ः सकारा� त� य �ङद"ुम� य 1नY यं लोपः। A उ"म-पुSषः affix ending in a सकारः, always gets elided if

it is of a लकारः which is �ङत।् By 1-1-52 अलोऽ�Yय�य only the ending सकारः takes लोपः ।

उदाहरणम ्– भवाव (√भू-धातुः, ल¾t, उ"म-पुSषः, (aवचनम)्

भू + ल¾t 3-3-162 = भू + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= भू + वस ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-107, वस ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= भू + व 3-4-85, 3-4-99 = भू + आt व 3-4-92, 1-1-46 = भू + आ व 1-3-3

= भू + शप ् + आव 3-1-68, शप ् which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= भो + शप ्+ आव 7-3-84 = भो + अ + आव 1-3-3, 1-3-8, 1-3-4 = भव + आव 6-1-78 = भवाव 6-1-

101

************* May 28th 2011 ***********

309) 3-2-111 अनuतने लE

व�ृ"ः अनuतन-भूताथ�-व"ेृधा�तोल�E � यात ्। The affix लँE follows a धातःु when used in the sense of

past not of today.

310) 6-4-71 लुEलEलEृ¡वडुदा"ः

व�ृ"ः ए� वEगस ्याt �यात ्। When followed by लँुE, लँE or लृँE, an अEगम ्gets the ‘अt’-आगमः which

is उदा"ः।

उदाहरणम ्– अभवत ्(√भू-धातुः, लँE, ]थम-पSुषः, एकवचनम)्

भू + लE 3-2-111 = भू + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3



311) 3-4-100 इतp च

व�ृ"ः �ङतो ल� य पर� मैपदLमकारा� त ंय"द� त� य लोपः । The ending letter (इकारः) of a इकारा�तः

(ending in a इकारः) पर�मैपद-]Yययः which came in the place of a �ङत-्लकारः, is elided.


78

भू + 1तप ्= भू + 1त 1-3-3 = भू + त ्3-4-100

= भू + शप ्+ त ्3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113 = भो + शप ्+ त ्7-3-

84

= भो + अ + त ्1-3-3, 1-3-8 = भवत ्6-1-78 = अt भवत ्6-4-71, 1-1-46 = अभवत ्1-3-3

312) 3-3-161 �व�ध1नम� �णाम� �णाधी� टसं]p न]ाथ�नेषु LलE

व�ृ"ः ए� वथHषु धातोLल�E । The affix LलE is prescribed after a धातःु when used in the sense of

command, direction, invitation, request, inquiry or entreaty.

गीतासु उदाहरणम ्– धात�राZा रणे ह�यु�त�मे Mेमतरं भवेत ् || 1-46||

(भवेत ्, �व�ध-LलँE, ]थम-पSुषः, एकवचनम ्)

313) 3-4-103 यासुt पर� मैपदेषदूा"ो �ङr च

व�ृ"ः Lलङः पर� मैपदानां यासुडागमो �ङr च । The पर� मैपद-]Yयया: of LलँE get यासुt as an augment,

and this augment is उदा"ः and a �ङत।्

Note: In the यासुt-आगमः, the उकारः before the टकारः is उrचारणाथ�म।्

उदाहरणम ्– भवेत ्(√भू-धातुः, �व�ध-LलँE, ]थम-पुSषः, एकवचनम)्

भू + LलE 3-3-161 = भू + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= भू + 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= भू + 1त 1-3-3 = भू + त ्3-4-100 = भू + यासुt त ्3-4-103, 1-1-46 = भू + यास ् त ्1-3-3

= भू + शप ् + यास ् त ्3-1-68, शप ् which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= भो + शप ्+ यास ्त ्7-3-84 = भो + अ + यास ्त ्1-3-3, 1-3-8 = भव यास ्त ्6-1-78


314) 7-2-79 Lलङः सलोपोऽन� Y य� य

व�ृ"ः साव�धातकुLलङोऽन� Y य� य स� य लोपः । The सकारः of a साव�धातकु-LलE affix is elided, provided

it is not the final letter of the affix.


भव यास ्त।् The सकारः of the affix ‘यास ्त’् would have taken लोपः by 7-2-79, instead the next

सू�म ्applies.


315) 7-2-80 अतो येयः

व�ृ"ः अतः पर� य साव�धातुकावयव� य यास ्इY य� य इय ्। When ‘यास’् of a साव�धातकु-]Yययः follows an

अEगम ्ending in a अकारः, then it is substituted by ‘इय’् ।


79

भव यास ्त ्= भव इय ्त ्7-2-80


316) 6-1-66 लोपो { योव�Lल

व�ृ"ः वकारयकारयोल\पः �याaLल । A वकारः or a यकारः is elided when it is followed by a letter of the

वल-्]Yयाहारः।


भव इय ्त ्= भव इत ्6-1-66 = भवेत ्6-1-87

317) 3-4-108 झेजु�स ्

व�ृ"ः Lलङो झेजु�स ्� यात ्। The affix ‘6झ’ of LलE is replaced by ‘जुस’्।

उदाहरणम ्– भवेयःु (√भू-धातुः, �व�ध-LलँE, ]थम-पुSषः, बहुवचनम)्

भू + LलE 3-3-161 = भू + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= भू + 6झ 3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 6झ gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= भू + जुस ्3-4-108, जुस ्also gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 1-1-56

= भू + उस ्1-3-7, 1-3-4

= भू + यासुt उस ्3-4-103, 1-1-46 = भू + यास ्उस ्1-3-3

= भू + शप ् + यास ् उस ्3-1-68, शप ् which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= भो + शप ् + यास ् उस ्7-3-84 = भो + अ + यास ् उस ्1-3-3, 1-3-8

= भव यास ्उस ्6-1-78 = भव इय ्उस ्7-2-80 = भवेयुस ्6-1-87 = भवेयुः 8-2-66, 8-3-15

318) 6-4-72 आडजादIनाम ्

व�ृ"ः अजादेरEग� याऽऽt लँुEलँEलृँEMु । When followed by लँुE, लँE or लृँE, an अEगम ्which begins

with an अच ्gets आt as an augment.

उदाहरणम ्– आतत ्(√अत-्धातुः, लँE, ]थम-पSुषः, एकवचनम)्

अत ्+ लँE 3-2-111 = अत ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= अत ् + 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ् gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= अत ्+ 1त 1-3-3 = अत ्+ त ्3-4-100

= अत ् + शप ् + त ्3-1-68, शप ् which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= अत ्+ अ + त ्1-3-3, 1-3-8 = आt अतत ्6-4-72, 1-1-46

= आ अतत ्1-3-3 = आतत ्6-1-90

319) 1-4-10 s� व ंलघ ु

व�ृ"ः s�वमMरं लघुसCDं भव1त। A short vowel gets the designation ‘लघ’ु।

80

320) 1-4-11 संयोगे गुS

व�ृ"ः संयोगे परे s� वं गुSसCDं � यात ्। A short vowel gets the designation ‘गुS’ when followed by a

conjunct consonant (संयोगः)।

321) 1-4-12 दIघ� च

व�ृ"ः दIघ� चाMरं गुSसCDं भव1त। A long vowel also gets the designation ‘गुS’।

322) 7-3-86 पुग�तलघूपध�य च

व�ृ"ः पुग�त�य लघपूध�य चाEग�येको गुणः साव�धातुकाध�धातुकयोः । When a अEगम ्is followed by a

साव�धातकु-]Yययः or an आध�धातुक-]Yययः, then its इक्-letter takes गुण-आदेशः in the following two

cases:

i) The अEगम ्ends in a ‘पुक्’-आगमः।

or

ii) The penultimate letter of the अEगम ्has the लघु-सCDा।

गीतासु उदाहरणम ्-यो न ��य1त न aे�4 न शोच1त न काEM1त ||| 12-17||

शोच1त (√शुच-्धातुः, लँt , ]थम-पSुषः, एकवचनम)्

शुच ्+ लँt 3-2-123 = शुच ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= शुच ्+ 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ्gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= शुच ् + शप ् + 1तप ्3-1-68, शप ् which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= शुच ्+ अ + 1त 1-3-3, 1-3-8 = शोच ्+ अ + 1त 7-3-86 = शोच1त।

323) 6-1-65 णो नः

व�ृ"ः धाY वादेण�� य नः । There is the substitution of नकारः in the place of the initial णकारः of a धातःु

in the धात-ुपाठः।

Note: णोपदेशा� तु अनe� – ना(ट – नाथ ्– नाध ्– न� e – न� क – नॄ – नतृः ।

A धातुः is called णोपदेशः if it has an initial णकारः in the धात-ुपाठः। Among those verbal roots that

are found to begin with a नकार: at the time of usage in the language, only the following eight

verbal roots are नोपदेशा: – begin with a नकार: in the धातपुाठ:। (All others are णोपदेशा: – begin

with a णकार: in the धातुपाठ:।)

‘नe� – ना(ट – नाथ ्– नाध ्– न� e – न� क – नॄ – नतृ’्

324) 8-4-14 उपसगा�दसमासेऽ�प णोपदेश� य

व�ृ"ः उपसग�� थाि�नLम"ात ्पर� य णोपदेश�य धातोन�� य णः। The नकारः of the धातःु that is णोपदेशः

(begins with a णकार: in the धातुपाठ:), gets णकारः as a replacement, when it follows an उपसग�ः

that has the 1नLम"म ्(cause – रेफः, षकारः) to bring about णYवम।्

81

उदाहरणम:्

The धातःु ‘नम’् is listed in the धात-ुपाठः as ‘णमँ ]qYवे श}दे च १. ११३६’। Thus it is

णोपदेशः।

√णमँ = नम ्6-1-65, 1-3-2

नम ्+ लँt 3-2-123 = नम ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= नम ् + 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= नम ् + शप ् + 1तप ्3-1-68, शप ् which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= नम1त 1-3-3, 1-3-8

] + नम1त = ]णम1त 8-4-14

325) 1-3-5 आ(द�ञ�टुडवः

व�ृ"ः उपदेशे धातोराuा एते इतः � यःु । The letters �ञ, टु or डु occurring at the beginning of a धातुः in

the धात-ुपाठः get the designation ‘इत’्।

326) 7-1-58 इ(दतो नुम ्धातोः

व�ृ"ः इ(दतो धातोनु�मागमो भव1त । A धातुः which has इकारः as an इत ्gets the ‘नुँम’्-आगमः।

उदाहरणम ्– Consider the धातु: ‘टुन(दँ समFृौ’।

The ‘टु’ at the beginning of this धातःु gets इत-्सCDा by 1-3-5. The इकारः at the end gets इत-्सCDा

by 1-3-2. Therefore this धातुः is an इ(दत।्

Both the ‘टु’ and the ‘इ’ take लोप: by 1-3-9 त�य लोपः।

नe 1-3-5, 1-3-2, 1-3-9 = न नुँम ्e 7-1-58, 1-1-47 = न न ्e 1-3-2, 1-3-3, 1-3-9, 8-3-24, 8-4-58.

327) 3-1-28 गुपूधपू�विrछप6णप1नkय आयः

व�ृ"ः एk य आय]Y ययः � यात ् � वाथH । The roots √गुप ्(गुपूँ रMणे १. ४६१), √धूप ्(धूपँ स�तापे १.

४६२), √�वrl (�वrछँ गतौ ६. १५९), √पण ्(पणँ {यवहारे �तुतौ च १. ५०७), and √पन ्(पनँ च

[{यवहारे �ततुौ च] १. ५०८) get the आय-]Yययः and their sense is unaffected.

उदाहरणम ्– गोपाय1त (√गुप-्धातुः, लँt, ]थम-पSुषः, एकवचनम)्

गुप ्+ आय 3-1-28


328) 3-4-114 आध�धातुकं शेषः

व�ृ"ः 1त�Eशek योऽ� यो धातोjर1त �व(हतः ]Y यय एतY संDः � यात ्। An affix, which does not belong to

the 1तE-]Yयाहारः and does not have शकारः as an इत,् gets the designation of आध�धातुकम ्if it is

prescribed in the ‘धातो:’ अ�धकार:।


गुप ्+ आय = गोप ्+ आय 3-4-114, 7-3-86 = गोपाय

82


329) 3-1-32 सनाu�ता धातवः

व�ृ"ः सनादयः कमे6ण�ङ� ताः ]Y यया अ� ते येषां ते धातुसCDकाः । A term ending in an affix, which is

prescribed in the section starting from सन ्(ref. 3-1-5 गु1`ि�कekयः सन)् up to 6णE (ref. 3-1-

30 कमे6ण�E), gets the designation of ‘धातु:’ (verbal root.)

Note: सन,् �यच,् का|यच,् �यE, �यष,् ि�वप*् (only the ि�वप ्which is prescribed by the वा�"�कम ्

‘सव�]ा1तप(दकेkयः ि�व}वा व�{यः’ under the सू�म ्3-1-10 उपमानादाचारे), 6णच,् यE, यक्, आय, ईयE

and 6णE are the twelve affixes that are called सनादयः।


By 3-1-32, गोपाय gets धात-ुसCDा। Now we can add the लकाराः लँt etc. to the गोपाय-धातुः।

गोपाय + लँt 3-2-123 = गोपाय + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= गोपाय + 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ् gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= गोपाय + शप ्+ 1तप ्3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113 = गोपाय + अ

+ 1त 1-3-3, 1-3-8 = गोपाय1त 6-1-97

330) 3-1-70 वा �ाश-kलाश-�मु-:मु-�लमु-�Lस-�(ुट-लषः

व�ृ"ः एk यः p य� वा क��थH साव�धातकेु परे। पMे शप।् The pयन-्]Yयय: is optionally placed after the

following verbal roots – √�ाश ्(टु�ाशृ ँ– [दI`ौ]१. ९५८), √kलाश ्(टुkलाशृ ँदI`ौ १. ९५९), √�म ्(�मँु

चलने १. ९८५, �मँु अनव�थाने ४. १०२), √:म ्(:मँु पाद�वMेपे १. ५४५), √�लम ्(�लमँु �लानौ ४.

१०४), √�स ्(�सी« उaेगे ४. ११), √�tु (�टँु छेदने ६. १०२) and √लष ्(लष ँका�तौ १. १०३३) – when

followed by a साव�धातकु-]Yयय: that is used signifying the agent.

In the other case (when the pयन-्]Yयय: is not used) the default शप-्]Yयय: is used by 3-1-68.

उदाहरणम ्– :ा| य1त (√:म-्धातुः, लँt, ]थम-पुSषः, एकवचनम)्

:म ्+ लँt 3-2-123 = :म ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3 = :म ्+ 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ्

gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= :म ्+ pयन ्+ 1तप ्3-1-70, pयन ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113 = :म ्+ य +

1त 1-3-3, 1-3-8


331) 7-3-76 :मः पर�मैपदेषु।

व�ृ"ः :मो दIघ�ः पर� मैपदे Lश1त। The vowel (the letter ‘अ’) of the verbal root √:म ्(:मँु पाद�वMपेे

१. ५४५) is elongated when followed by a Lशत ्affix, which itself is followed by a पर�मैपदम ्affix.


83

:म ्+ य + 1त = :ा| य1त 7-3-76

In the case where the pयन-्]Yयय: is not used, the default शप-्]Yयय: is used by 3-1-68, giving the

form :ाम1त।

332) 7-3-78 पाÂा_मा�था|नादाn3pय�"�स�"�शदसदां �पबिजÂधम1तxमनयrछपpयrछ�धौशीयसीदाः

व�ृ"ः पादIना ं�पबादयः � यjुरY सCDकशकारादौ ]Y यये परे । When followed by an affix which begins

with the letter ‘श’् as a इत,् the verbal roots √पा (पा पाने १. १०७४), √Âा (Âा ग�धोपादाने १.

१०७५), √_मा (_मा श}दाि�नसंयोगयोः १. १०७६), √�था(xा ग1त1नव"ृौ १. १०७७), √|ना (|ना अkयासे

१. १०७८), √दा (दाण ् दाने १. १०७९), √3श ्(3Lशरँ ् ]ेMणे १. ११४३), √ऋ (ऋ ग1त]ापणयोः १.

१०८६), √स ृ(स ृ गतौ १. १०८५), √शe (शeऌँ शातने १. ९९१, ६. १६४) and √सe (षeऌँ

�वशरणगYयवसादनेषु १. ९९०, ६. १६३) are substituted by ‘�पब’, ‘िजÂ’, ‘धम’, ‘1तx’, ‘मन’, ‘यrछ’, ‘पpय’,

‘ऋrछ’, ‘धौ’, ‘शीय’ and ‘सीद’ respectively.

Note: �पबादेशोऽद�त�तेन न गुणः। The substitute ‘�पब’ (in place of ‘पा’) is actually ending in the

letter ‘अ’। (This letter ‘अ’ is not उrचारणाथ�:।) So the उपधा (penultimate letter) in ‘�पब’ is the letter

‘ब’् and not the letter ‘इ’। Thus7-3-86 (which requires a लघूपधा) cannot do the गुणादेश: in place of

the letter ‘इ’।

धातःु आदेशः उदाहरणम ्

(१) √पा (पा पाने १. १०७४) �पब �पब1त

(२) √Âा (Âा ग�धोपादाने १. १०७५) िजÂ िजÂ1त

(३) √_मा (_मा श}दाि�नसंयोगयोः १. १०७६) धम धम1त

(४) √�था (xा ग1त1नव"ृौ १. १०७७) 1तx 1तx1त

(५) √|ना (|ना अkयासे १. १०७८ ) मन मन1त

(६) √दाण ्(दाण ्दाने १. १०७९) यrछ यrछ1त

(७) √3श ्(3Lशरँ ्]ेMणे १. ११४३) पpय पpय1त

(८) √ऋ (ऋ ग1त]ापणयोः १. १०८६) ऋrछ ऋrछ1त

(९) √स ृ(स ृगतौ १. १०८५) धौ धाव1त

(१०) √शe (शeऌँ शातने १. ९९१, ६. १६४) शीय शीयते

(११) √सe (षeऌँ �वशरणगYयवसादनेषु १. ९९०, ६. १६३) सीद सीद1त

उदाहरणम ्– �पब1त (√पा-धातुः, लँt, ]थम-पSुषः, एकवचनम)्

पा + लँt 3-2-123 = पा + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

84

= पा + 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ् gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= पा + शप ्+ 1तप ्3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113 = �पब + शप ्+

1तप ्7-3-78, 1-3-10, 1-1-55 = �पब + अ + 1त 1-3-3, 1-3-8 (Note: 7-3-86 does not apply because

the उपधा of the अEगम ्‘�पब’ is the letter ‘ब’् and not the letter ‘इ’) = �पब1त 6-1-97

333) 3-1-74 �ुवः श ृच ।

व�ृ"ः �ुवः ‘श’ृ इY यादेशः � यात ् p नु]Y ययp च शि}वषये। The �ु-]Yययः is placed after the verbal

root √�ु (�ु �वणे १. १०९२), when followed by a साव�धातकु-]Yयय: that is used signifying the agent.

Simultaneously, ‘�ु’ takes the substitution ‘श’ृ।

Note: This सू�म ्is an अपवाद: for 3-1-68 कत�jर शप ्।

गीतासु उदाहरणम ् – आTय�वrचनैम�यः शणृो1त �ुYवाXयेन ं वेद न चवै किTत ् || 2-29||

शणृो1त (√�ु-धातुः, लँt, ]थम-पुSषः, एकवचनम)्

�ु + लँt 3-2-123 = �ु + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3 = �ु + 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ्gets

साव�धातकु-सCDा by3-4-113

= श ृ+ �ु + 1त 3-1-74, �ु which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113 = श ृ+ न ु+ 1त 1-3-8.


334) 1-2-4 साव�धातकुम�पत ्

व�ृ"ः अ�पY साव�धातुकं �ङaत ्। A साव�धातुक-]Yयय: which does not have पकारः as an इत ्becomes

�ङaत ्(behaves like having a ङकारः as an इत)्।

335) 1-1-5 ि��ङ1त च

व�ृ"ः �गिY कि� ङि�नLम"े इ� लMणे गुणवFृी न � तः । An affix which has a गकार: or a ककार: or a

ङकार: as an इत,् is not allowed to perform an operation of गुण: or व�ृF: on an इक् vowel

(reference 1-1-3 इको गुणवFृी)।

Example continued from above:

श ृ+ न ु+ 1त

The ]Yयय: ‘नु’ is �ङaत ् by 1-2-4. Therefore 1-1-5 prevents 7-3-84 from performing the गुण:

substitution for the ऋकार: of ‘श’ृ

= श ृ+ नो + 1त 7-3-84 = शणृो1त (वा�"�कम ्(under 8-4-1) – ऋवणा��न�य णYवं वाrयम)्।

(aतीयम ्उदाहरणम।्

शणृतुः (√�ु-धातुः, लँt, ]थम-पSुषः, (aवचनम)्

�ु + लँt 3-2-123 = �ु + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3 = �ु + तस ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1-3-4, तस ्


85

= श ृ+ � ु+ तस ्3-1-74, � ुwhich is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113 = श ृ+ न ु+ तस ्1-3-8.

Both ‘नु’ as well as ‘तस’् are �ङaत ्by 1-2-4. Therefore 1-1-5 prevents 7-3-84 from performing the

गुण: substitution for the ऋकार: of ‘श’ृ as well as the उकार: of ‘न’ु।

= शणृतुः 8-2-66, 8-3-15, (वा�"�कम ्(under 8-4-1) – ऋवणा��न�य णYवं वाrयम)्।

336) 6-4-87 हु�ुवोः साव�धातकेु

व�ृ"ः जुहोते: �ु]Yयया�त�यानेकाचोऽEग�य चासंयोगपूव\वण��य यण ्� यादजादौ साव�धातुके। The वकारः is

the replacement for उकारः of the √हु-धातुः or for the उकारः at the end of an अEगम ्that is

अनेकाच ् (has more than one vowel) and ends in the �-ु]Yयय:, provided

i) a conjunct consonant does not precede the उकारः।

ii) a साव�धातुक-]Yययः beginning with a vowel follows the उकारः।

Note: The यण-्आदेश: prescribed by this सू�म ्is an अपवाद: for the उवEँ-आदेश: that would have

otherwise been done by 6-4-77.

उदाहरणम ्– शnृ वि� त (√�ु-धातुः, लँt, ]थम-पSुषः, बहुवचनम)्

�ु + लँt 3-2-123 = �ु + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3 = �ु + 6झ 3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 6झ gets

साव�धातकु-सCDा by3-4-113

= श ृ+ �ु + 6झ 3-1-74, � ुwhich is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113 = श ृ+ न ु+ 6झ 1-3-8

Both ‘न’ु as well as ‘6झ’ are �ङaत ्by 1-2-4. Therefore 1-1-5 prevents 7-3-84 from performing the


= श ृ+ नु + अि�त 7-1-3

= श ृ+ न ्व ्+ अि� त 6-4-87 = शnृ वि� त (वा�"�कम ्(under 8-4-1) – ऋवणा��न�य णYवं वाrयम)्

337) 6-4-107 लोपTा�या�यतर�या ं|वोः

व�ृ"ः असंयोगपवू�� य ]Y ययोकार� य लोपो वा | वोः परयोः। The उकारः belonging to an affix and not

preceded by a conjunct consonant is elided optionally, if followed by a मकारः or वकारः।

उदाहरणम ्– शणृवुः/शnृ वः (√�ु-धातुः, लँt, उ"म-पुSषः, (aवचनम)्

�ु + लँt 3-2-123 = �ु + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= �ु + वस ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-107, वस ्gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= श ृ+ �ु + वस ्3-1-74, �ु which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113 = श ृ+ नु + वस ्1-3-

8, 1-3-4

Both ‘न’ु as well as ‘वस’् are �ङaत ्by 1-2-4. Therefore 1-1-5 prevents 7-3-84 from performing the


= शनृुवस/् श�ृवस ्6-4-107, 1-1-52 = शनृवुः/श�ृवः 8-2-66, 8-3-15 = शणृवुः/शnृ वः (वा�"�कम ्(under 8-4-

1) – ऋवणा��न�य णYवं वाrयम)्

338) 6-4-106 उतT ]Yययादसंयोगपवूा�त ्

व�ृ"ः असंयोगपवूा�Y ]Y ययोतो हेलु�क्। The (ह-]Yययः (of ल¾t) is elided if it follows a उकारः of an affix

and the उकार: is not preceded by a conjunct consonant.

86

उदाहरणम ्– शणृ ु(√�ु-धातुः, ल¾t, म_यम-पुSषः, एकवचनम)्

�ु + ल¾t = �ु + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= �ु + Lसप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-105, Lसप ् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= �ु + Lस 1-3-3

= �ु + (ह 3-4-87, (ह also gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 1-1-56

= श ृ + �ु + (ह 3-1-74, �ु which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= श ृ+ नु + (ह 1-3-8

Both ‘नु’ as well as ‘(ह’ (which is अ�पत ्by 3-4-87) are �ङaत ्by 1-2-4. Therefore 1-1-5 prevents 7-

3-84 from performing the गुण: substitution for the ऋकार: of ‘श’ृ as well as the उकार: of ‘न’ु।

= शनृु 6-4-106 = शणृ ु(वा�"�कम ्(under 8-4-1) – ऋवणा��न�य णYवं वाrयम)्

339) 6-1-96 उ�यपदा�तात ्

व�ृ"ः अपदा� तादवणा�दLुस परे परOपमेकादेशः। In place of the preceding अवण�: (अकार:/आकार:), which

is not at the end of a पदम,् and the following उकार: of the उस-्]Yयय:, there shall be a single

substitute which is the latter (उकार:)।

उदाहरणम ्– शणृयुःु (√�ु-धातुः, �व�ध-LलँE, ]थम-पुSषः, बहुवचनम)्

�ु + LलE 3-3-161 = �ु + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= �ु + 6झ 3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 6झ gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= �ु + जुस ्3-4-108, जुस ्also gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 1-1-56

= �ु + उस ्1-3-7, 1-3-4

= �ु + यासुt उस ्3-4-103, 1-1-46 = �ु + यास ्उस ्1-3-3

= श ृ+ �ु + यास ्उस ्3-1-74, �ु which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= श ृ+ नु + यास ्उस ्1-3-8

Now ‘न’ु is �ङaत ्by 1-2-4 and ‘यास ्उस’् is �ङत ्by 3-4-103. Therefore 1-1-5 prevents 7-3-84 from

performing the गुण: substitution for the ऋकार: of ‘श’ृ as well as the उकार: of ‘न’ु।

= श ृ+ नु + या उस ्7-2-79

= श ृ+ नु + युस ्6-1-96

= शनृुयु: 8-2-66, 8-3-15 = शणृयुु: (वा�"�कम ्(under 8-4-1) – ऋवणा��न�य णYवं वाrयम)्

340) 7-3-77 इषुगLमयमां छः

व�ृ"ः एषा ंछः � यािrछ1त। When followed by an affix which begins with the letter ‘श’् as an इत,् the

ending letter of the verbal roots √इष ्(इषु ँइrछायाम ्६. ७८), √गम ्(गम ॢँ गतौ १. ११३७)

and √यम ्(यमँ उपरमे १. ११३९) gets the letter ‘l’ as replacement.

गीतासु उदाहरणम ्– अ]ाXय योगसंLस�F ंकां ग1त ंकृ�ण गrछ1त ।। 6-37 ।।

गrछ1त (√गम-्धातुः, लँt, ]थम-पुSषः, एकवचनम)्

गम ्+ लँt 3-2-123 = गम ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

87

= गम ्+ 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ्gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= गम ् + शप ् + 1तप ्3-1-68, शप ् which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= गम ्+ अ + 1त 1-3-3, 1-3-8 = गl + अ + 1त 7-3-77


341) 6-1-73 छे च

व�ृ"ः s� व� य छे तक्ु । A short vowel (s�वः) gets the तुँक्-आगमः when a छकारः follows in

सं(हतायाम।्


ग l + अ + 1त = ग तुँक् l + अ1त 6-1-73, 1-1-46 = ग त ्छ 1त 1-3-2, 1-3-3 = गrछ1त 8-4-40

342) 3-4-79 (टत आYमनेपदानां टेरे

व�ृ"ः (टतो ल� याY मनेपदानां टेरेY वम ्। The (ट-भागः of a आYमनेपद-]Yययः which substitutes a (टत-्

लकारः (a लकार: which has टकार: as a इत)्, gets एकारः as the replacement.

Note: The (ट-सCDा is defined by 1-1-64 अचोऽ�Yया(द (ट।

उदाहरणम ्– एधते (√एध ्– एध ँ वFृौ धात-ुपाठः १. २), लँt, कत�jर ]योग:, ]थम-पुSषः, एकवचनम।्

The ending अकारः of the धातःु-√एध ्has a अनुदा"-�वरः। As per 1-3-12 अनदुा"�ङत

आYमनेपदम,् √एध-्धातुः will get आYमनेपद-]Yययाः।

एध ्+ लँt 3-2-123 = एध ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= एध ् + त 3-4-78, 1-4-100, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, त gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= एध ् + ते 3-4-79 = एध ् + शप ् + ते 3-1-68, शप ् gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= एध ्+ अ + ते 1-3-3, 1-3-8 = एधते

343) 7-2-81 आतो �ङतः

व�ृ"ः अतः पर� य �ङतामाकार� य इय ्� यात ्। The आकारः of a �ङत-्]Yययः (a ]Yयय: which has ङकार:

as a इत)् which follows an अEगम ्ending in अकारः, is replaced by ‘इय’्।

उदाहरणम ् – एधेते (√एध ्– एध ँ वFृौ धात-ुपाठः १. २), लँt, कत�jर ]योग:, ]थम-पुSषः, (aवचनम।्

एध ्+ लँt 3-2-123 = एध ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= एध ्+ आताम ्3-4-78, 1-4-100, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, आताम ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-

113

= एध ्+ आते 3-4-79

= एध ्+ शप ्+ आते 3-1-68, शप ्gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= एध ्+ अ + आते 1-3-3, 1-3-8

88

= एध + इय ्ते 7-2-81 (since आताम ्has साव�धातकु-सCDा and is not a �पत,् it is �ङaत ्by 1-2-4)

= एध + इ ते 6-1-66 = एधेते 6-1-87

344) 3-4-80 थास�से

व�ृ"ः (टतो ल� य थासः से � यात ्। The affix ‘थास’् which substitutes a (टत-्लकारः (a लकार: which

has टकार: as a इत)्, gets ‘से’ as the replacement.

उदाहरणम ्– एधसे (√एध ्– एध ँवFृौ धात-ुपाठः १. २), लँt, कत�jर ]योग:, म_यम-पुSषः, एकवचनम।्

एध ्+ लँt 3-2-123 = एध ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= एध ्+ थास ्3-4-78, 1-4-100, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-105, थास ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= एध ्+ से 3-4-80, 1-1-55, से also gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 1-1-56

= एध ्+ शप ्+ से 3-1-68, शप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= एध ्+ अ + से 1-3-3, 1-3-8 = एधसे

345) 3-4-90 आमेतः

व�ृ"ः ल¾ट एकार� याम ्� यात ्। The एकार: of ल¾t is replaced by ‘आम’्।

उदाहरणम ्– एधताम ्(√एध ्– एध ँवFृौ धात-ुपाठः १. २), ल¾t, कत�jर ]योग:, ]थम-पSुषः, एकवचनम।्

एध ्+ ल¾t 3-3-162 = एध ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3


= एध ्+ ते 3-4-79 = एध ्+ ताम ्3-4-90 = एध ्+ शप ्+ ताम ्3-1-68, शप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-

4-113

= एध ्+ अ + ताम ्1-3-3, 1-3-8 = एधताम ्

346) 3-4-91 सवाkयां वामौ

व�ृ"ः सवाk यां पर� य लोडतेः :माe वाऽमौ � तः । The letter ‘ए’ of ल¾t which follows the letter ‘स’् or

‘व’् is replaced by ‘व’ and ‘अम’् respectively.

उदाहरणम ्– एध�व (√एध ्– एध ँवFृौ धात-ुपाठः १. २), ल¾t, कत�jर ]योग:, म_यम-पुSषः, एकवचनम।्

एध ्+ ल¾t 3-3-162 = एध ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= एध ्+ थास ्3-4-78, 1-4-100, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-105, थास ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= एध ् + से 3-4-80, 1-1-55, से also gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 1-1-56

= एध ् + �व 3-4-91 = एध ् + शप ् + �व 3-1-68, शप ् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= एध ्+ अ + �व 1-3-3, 1-3-8 = एध�व

एध_वम ् (√एध ्– एध ँ वFृौ धात-ुपाठः १. २), ल¾t, कत�jर ]योग:, म_यम-पुSषः, बहुवचनम।्

एध ्+ ल¾t 3-3-162 = एध ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

89

= एध ्+ _वम ्3-4-78, 1-4-100, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-105, 1-3-4, _वम ्gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-

4-113

= एध ्+ _वे 3-4-79 = एध ्+ _वम ्3-4-91

= एध ्+ शप ्+ _वम ्3-1-68, शप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= एध ्+ अ + _वम ्1-3-3, 1-3-8 = एध_वम ्

347) 3-4-93 एत ऐ

व�ृ"ः ल¾डु"म� य एत ऐ � यात ्। The एकार: of ल¾t in उ"म-पुSषः is replaced by ऐकारः ।

उदाहरणम ् – एधै (√एध ्– एध ँ वFृौ धात-ुपाठः १. २), ल¾t, कत�jर ]योग:, उ"म-पुSषः, एकवचनम।्

एध ्+ ल¾t 3-3-162 = एध ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= एध ् + इt 3-4-78, 1-4-100, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-107, इt gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= एध ्+ इ 1-3-3 = एध ्+ ए 3-4-79 = एध ्+ ऐ 3-4-93

= एध ्+ आt ऐ 3-4-92, 1-1-46 = एध ्+ आ ऐ 1-3-3 = एध ्+ ऐ 6-1-90

= एध ्+ शप ्+ ऐ 3-1-68, शप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= एध ्+ अ + ऐ 1-3-3, 1-3-8 = एध ै6-1-88

348) 3-4-102 Lलङ�सीयtु

व�ृ"ः Lलङादेशानां सीयुडागमो भव1त । The affixes of LलँE get सीयुt as the augment.

Note: In the सीयtु-आगमः, the उकारः before the टकारः is उrचारणाथ�:।

उदाहरणम ्– एधेत (√एध ्– एध ँवFृौ धात-ुपाठः १. २), �व�धLलँE, कत�jर ]योग:, ]थम-पुSषः, एकवचनम।्

एध ्+ LलँE 3-3-161 = एध ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3


= एध ्+ सीयtु त 3-4-102, 1-1-46 = एध ्+ सीय ्त 1-3-3, उकारः before the टकारः is उrचारणाथ�:

= एध ् + शप ् + सीय ् त 3-1-68, शप ् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= एध ् + अ + सीय ् त 1-3-3, 1-3-8 = एध ् + अ + ई य ् त 7-2-79 = एध ् + अ + ई त 6-1-66

= एधेत 6-1-87

349) 3-4-105 झ�य रन ्

व�ृ"ः Lलँङो झ� य रन ्� यात ्। The affix ‘झ’ of LलँE is replaced by ‘रन’्।

उदाहरणम ्– एधेरन ्(√एध ्– एध ँवFृौ धात-ुपाठः १. २), �व�धLलँE, कत�jर ]योग:, ]थम-पSुषः, बहुवचनम।्

एध ्+ LलँE 3-3-161 = एध ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= एध ् + झ 3-4-78, 1-4-100, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, झ gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= एध ् + रन ्3-4-105, 1-1-55, 1-3-4, रन ् also gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 1-1-56

= एध ्+ सीयtु रन ्3-4-102, 1-1-46 = एध ्+ सीय ्रन ्1-3-3, उकारः before the टकारः is उrचारणाथ�:

= एध ् + शप ् + सीय ् रन ्3-1-68, शप ् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

90

= एध ्+ अ + सीय ् रन ्1-3-3, 1-3-8 = एध ्+ अ + ई य ् रन ्7-2-79 = एध ्+ अ + ई रन ्6-1-66

= एधेरन ्6-1-87

350) 3-4-105 इटोऽत ्

व�ृ"ः Lलँङादेश� य इटोऽY � यात ्। The affix इt of LलँE is replaced by अकार:।

उदाहरणम ्– एधेय (√एध ्– एध ँवFृौ धात-ुपाठः १. २), �व�धLलँE, कत�jर ]योग:, उ"म-पुSषः, एकवचनम।्

एध ्+ LलँE 3-3-161 = एध ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= एध ् + इt 3-4-78, 1-4-100, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-107, इt gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= एध ्+ अ 3-4-106 = एध ्+ सीयtु अ 3-4-102, 1-1-46

= एध ्+ सीय ्अ 1-3-3, उकारः before the टकारः is उrचारणाथ�:

= एध ्+ शप ्+ सीय ्अ 3-1-68, शप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= एध ्+ अ + सीय ्अ 1-3-3, 1-3-8 = एध ्+ अ + ईय ्अ 7-2-79 = एधेय 6-1-87

351) 1-3-13 भावकम�णोः

व�ृ"ः ल� याY मनेपदम ्। When denoting the action of the verb (भावे) or the object of the verb

(कम�6ण), आYमनेपद-]Yययाः are used in the place of a लकार:।

उदाहरणम ् – प�यते (√प� kवा(द-गणः, पठँ {य�ायां वा�च १. ३८१), लँt, भावे/कम�6ण, ]थम-पुSषः,

एकवचनम।्

प� + लँt 3-4-69, 3-2-123 = प� + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= प� + त 1-3-13, 3-4-78, 1-4-100, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, त gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-

113 = प� + ते 3-4-79


352) 3-1-67 साव�धातकेु यक्

व�ृ"ः धातोय�क् भावकम�वा�च1न साव�धातकेु । The यक्-]Yययः follows a धातःु when a साव�धातकु-]Yययः

follows denoting the action of the verb (भावे) or the object of the verb (कम�6ण)।


प� + ते = प� + यक् + ते 3-1-67, यक् gets आध�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-114 = प�यते 1-3-3

353) 7-4-25 अकृYसाव�धातकुयोदKघ�ः

व�ृ"ः अज�ताEग�य दIघ\ यादौ ]Yयये न त ुकृYसाव�धातकुयोः । The ending vowel of an अEगम ् is

elongated when followed by a ]Yययः which begins with a यकार:, as long as the ]Yयय: neither

has the कृत-्सCDा nor the साव�धातकु-सCDा।

उदाहरणम ्– �ूयते (√�ु kवा(द-गणः, �ु �वणे, धात-ुपाठः #१. १०९२), लँt, भावे/कम�6ण, ]थम-पुSषः,


91

�ु + लँt 3-4-69, 3-2-123 = �ु + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= �ु + त 1-3-13, 3-4-78, 1-4-100, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, त gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-

113 = �ु + ते 3-4-79

= �ु + यक् + ते 3-1-67, यक् gets आध�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-114. Since यक् is a wकत,् 1-1-

5 prevents 7-3-84 from doing a गुणादेश: in place of the ending उकार: of the अEगम।्

= �ु + य + ते 1-3-3= �ू + य + ते 7-4-25 = �ूयते

354) 7-4-28 jरE शयि�लEM ु

व�ृ"ः शे यwक यादावाध�धातकेु Lलँ�ङ च ऋतो jरE आदेशः �यात ् । The ending ऋकारः (ऋत)् of an

अEगम ् is replaced by jरE, when followed by any one of the following:

1. श-]Yयय:

2. यक्-]Yयय:

3. यकारा(द: (beginning with a यकार:) आध�धातकु-]Yययः of LलँE।

Note: रI�ङ ]कृते jर�Eवधानसाम या�e दIघ\ न । 7-4-25 is not applied after applying 7-4-28 for the

following reason -

In the अ4ा_यायी, the सू�म ्7-4-27 रIE ऋतः comes right before 7-4-28 jरE शयि�लEM।ु If पा6ण1नः

wanted to get the दIघ�-आदेशः then he would have used the अनवु�ृ"ः of रIE from 7-4-27. The fact

that he has introduced jरE in 7-4-28 is a Dापकम ्(indication) that after applying 7-4-28, the दIघ�-

आदेशः should not be done (by 7-4-25.)

उदाहरणम ्– w:यते (√कृ, तना(द-गणः, डुकृञ ्करणे, धात-ुपाठः # ८. १०), लँt, भावे/कम�6ण, ]थम-पुSषः,


कृ + लँt 3-4-69, 3-2-123 = कृ + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= कृ + त 1-3-13, 3-4-78, 1-4-100, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, त gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-

113 = कृ + ते 3-4-79

= कृ + यक् + ते 3-1-67, यक् gets आध�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-114. Since यक् is a wकत,् 1-1-

5 prevents 7-3-84 from doing a गुणादेश: in place of the ending ऋकार: of the अEगम।्

= कृ + य + ते 1-3-3 = क् jरE + य + ते 7-4-28, 1-1-53 = w: + य + ते 1-3-3 = w:यते

355) 6-1-64 धाYवादेः षः सः

व�ृ"ः धातोरादेः षकार�य �थाने सकारादेशो भव1त । The letter ‘स’् is substituted in place of the initial

letter ‘ष’् of a verbal root in the धात-ुपाठः।

गीतासु उदाहरणम ् v1-29 – सीदि�त (√सe, षeऌँ �वशरणगYयवसादनेषु १. ९९०), लँt, कत�jर ]योगः,

बहुवचनम।्

षeऌँ = √सe 6-1-64, 1-3-2

सe + लँt 3-4-69, 3-2-123 = सe + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= सe + 6झ 3-4-78, 6झ gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

92

= सe + शप ् + 6झ 3-1-68, शप ् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113 = सीद + शप ् + 6झ 7-3-78

= सीद + अ + 6झ 1-3-3, 1-3-8 = सीद + 6झ 6-1-97 = सीद + अ�त ्इ 7-1-3 = सीदि�त 6-1-97

356) 6-1-15 व�च�व�पयजादIनां wक1त

व�ृ"ः व�च� वX योय�जादIनां च स|]सारण ं � यात ् wक1त । The verbal roots √वच ्(वचँ पjरभाषणे २.

५८), √�वप ्(�ञ�वपँ शये २. ६३) and also the nine verbal roots beginning with √यज ्(यजँ

देवपूजासEग1तकरणदानेष ु१. ११५७) take स|]सारणम ्(ref. 1-1-45) when followed by an affix which is

a wकत।्

Note: The nine verbal roots √यज ्etc are the last nine in the kवा(द-गण:। They are as

follows: √यज ्(यजँ देवपजूासEग1तकरणदानेषु १. ११५७), √वप ्(डुवपँ बीजस�ताने | छेदनेऽ�प १.

११५८), √वc (वहँ ]ापणे १. ११५९), √वस ्(वसँ 1नवासे १. ११६०), √वे (वेञ ् त�तुस�ताने १.

११६१), √{ये ({येञ ्संवरणे १. ११६२), √qे (qेञ ्�पधा�या ंश}दे च १. ११६३), √वe (वदँ {य�ायां वा�च १.

११६४) and √िQ (tव¾िQ ग1तवeृ_योः १. ११६५)।

गीतासु उदाहरणम ् v6-8 – उrयते (√वच,् अदा(द-गणः, वचँ पjरभाषणे, धात-ुपाठः # २. ५८), लँt,

भावे/कम�6ण, ]थम-पुSषः, एकवचनम।्

वच ्+ लँt 3-4-69, 3-2-123 = वच ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= वच ्+ त 1-3-13, 3-4-78, 1-4-100, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, ‘त’ gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-

113 = वच ्+ ते 3-4-79

= वच ्+ यक् + ते 3-1-67, यक् gets आध�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-114

= वच ्+ य + ते 1-3-3 = व ्अ च ्+ य + ते = उ अ च ्+ य + ते 6-1-15, 1-1-45 = उrयते 6-1-108

357) 6-1-16 P(ह�याव1य{य�धव�4�वच1तवTृ1तपrृछ1तभ�ृजतीना ं�ङ1त च

व�ृ"ः एषां स| ]सारण ं� यात ्wक1त �ङ1त च । The verbal roots √Pc (Pहँ उपादाने ९. ७१), √�या (�या

वयोहानौ ९. ३४), √वय ्(वयँ गतौ १. ५४७), √{यध ्({यध ँ ताडने ४. ७८), √वश ्(वश ँ का�तौ २.

७५), √{यच ्({यचँ {याजीकरणे ६. १३), √ªT ्(ओ«ªTू ँछेदने ६. १२),√]rl (]rछँ DीXसायाम ्६.१४९)

and √��ज ्(��जँ पाके ६. ४) take स|]सारणम ्(ref. 1-1-45) when followed by an affix which is a

wकत ्or a �ङत।्

उदाहरणम ्– गfृते (√Pc, Ãया(द-गणः, Pहँ उपादाने, धात-ुपाठः # ९. ७१), लँt, भावे/कम�6ण, ]थम-पुSषः,


Pc + लँt 3-4-69, 3-2-123 = Pc + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= Pc + त 1-3-13, 3-4-78, 1-4-100, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, ‘त’ gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-

113 = Pc + ते 3-4-79

= Pc + यक् + ते 3-1-67, ‘यक्’ gets आध�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-114

93

= Pc + य + ते 1-3-3 = ग ्र ्अ c + य + ते = ग ्ऋ अ c + य + ते 6-1-16, 1-1-45 = गfृते 6-1-

108

358) 1-1-20 दाधा �वदाप ्

व�ृ"ः दाOपा धाOपाp च धातवो घुसCDाः � युदा�X दैपौ �वना। The verbal roots having the form ‘दा’ or ‘धा’,

except √दाप ्(लवने २. ५४) and √दैप ्(शोधने १. १०७३), get the घु-सCDा।

Note : The following 6 roots have the घ-ुसCDा । √दा [दाण ्दाने १. १०७९] , √दा [डुदाञ ्दाने ३.

१०], √दो [दो अवखnडने ४. ४३], √दे [देE रMणे १. १११७], √धा [डुधाञ ्धारणपोषणयोः | दान इYयXयेके ३.

११], √धे [धेt पाने १. १०५०] ।

The following verse illustrates this…

देE-दाणौ दो-डुदाञौ च, धेt-डुधाञावुभाव�प ।

पा6णनीये महात��,े ]ो�ा घसुCDका अमी ।।

359) 6-4-66 घुमा�थागापाजहा1तसां हLल

व�ृ"ः एषामात ईY � याFलादौ ि�ङY याध�धातुके। The आकारः of the verbal roots having the घु-सCDा and

the verbal roots√मा [मेE ]6णदाने १. १११६, मा माने २. ५७, माE माने श}दे च ३. ७, माE माने ४.

३७], √�था [xा ग1त1नव"ृौ १. १०७७], √गा [गै श}दे १. १०६५, गाE गतौ १. ११०१, गा �ततुौ ३. २६ as

well as the गा-आदेश: done in place of इण ्गतौ २. ४० and इक् �मरणे (1नYयम�धपूव�ः) २. ४१, as well

as the गाE-आदेश: in the place of इE अ_ययने (1नYयम�धपूव�ः) २. ४२], √पा [पा पाने १.

१०७४],√हा [ओ«हाक् Yयागे ३. ९] and √सो [षो अ�तकम�6ण ४. ४२] gets ईकारः as replacement, when

followed by a हला(द: (beginning with a consonant) आध�धातकु-]Yययः which is a wकत ्or a �ङत।्

गीतासु उदाहरणम ् v17-20 – दIयते (√दा, जुहोYया(द-गण:, डुदाञ ् दाने, धात-ुपाठः # ३. १०), लँt,

भावे/कम�6ण, ]थम-पुSषः, एकवचनम।् This धातु: has the घ-ुसCDा by 1-1-20.

दा + लँt 3-4-69, 3-2-123 = दा + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= दा + त 1-3-13, 3-4-78, 1-4-100, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, त gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-

113 = दा + ते 3-4-79

= दा + यक् + ते 3-1-67, यक् gets आध�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-114

= दा + य + ते 1-3-3 = दIयते 6-4-66

360) 3-1-30 कमे6ण�E

व�ृ"ः � वाथH । The affix 6णE comes after the धातःु √कम ्(कमँु का�तौ १. ५११)।

उदाहरणम ्– कामयते (√कम,् kवा(द-गणः, कमँु का�तौ, धात-ुपाठः #१. ५११) लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-

पुSषः, एकवचनम।्

कमँु + 6णE 3-1-30 = कम ्+ इ 1-3-2, 1-3-3, 1-3-7

94


361) 7-2-116 अत उपधायाः

व�ृ"ः उपधाया अतो व�ृFः � यात ्�ञ1त 6ण1त च ]Y यये परे । A penultimate (उपधा) letter ‘अ’ of a

अEगम ्(base) gets व�ृFः (ref. 1-1-1) as the substitute when followed by an affix which is a �ञत ्

(has the letter ‘ञ’् as a इत)् or a 6णत ्(has the letter ‘ण’् as a इत)्।

continued from above…

कम ्+ इ = काम ्+ इ 7-2-116 = काLम

‘काLम’ gets धात-ुसCDा by 3-1-32.

�ङhवा"E ।

Since the 6णE-]Yयय: has ङकार: as a इत,् as per 1-3-12 अनुदा"�ङत आYमनेपदम,् ‘काLम’ will get

आYमनेपद-]Yययाः।

काLम + लँt 3-2-123 = काLम + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= काLम + त 3-4-78, 1-4-100, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, त gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113 =

काLम + ते 3-4-79

= काLम + शप ्+ ते 3-1-68, शप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= काLम + अ + ते 1-3-3, 1-3-8 = कामे + अ + ते 7-3-84 = कामयते 6-1-78

362) 8-2-19 उपसग��यायतौ

व�ृ"ः अय1तपर� योपसग�� य यो रेफ� त� य लY वं � यात ् । The रेफः of a उपसग�ः gets लकारः as the

replacement when the उपसग�ः is followed by the धातुः √अय ्(अय-ँ [गतौ]१. ५४६)।

उदाहरणम ्– Xलायते [उपसग�ः ‘]’ + अयते]

अयते (√अय,् kवा(द-गणः, अय-ँ [गतौ] १. ५४६) लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-पुSषः, एकवचनम।्

The form अयते is derived from the धातःु √अय ्similar to एधते (√एध-्धातु:)।

Then with the उपसग�: ‘]’ we get -

] + अयते 1-4-59 = ]ायते 6-1-101 = Xलायते 8-2-19

Similarly with the उपसग�: ‘परा’ we get -

परा + अयते 1-4-59 = परायते 6-1-101 = पलायते 8-2-19

363) 2-4-72 अ(द]भ1ृतkयः शपः

व�ृ"ः अ(द]भ1ृतkयः उ"र�य शपः लुक् भव1त । The affix ‘शप’् takes the ‘लुक्’ elision when following a

verbal root belonging to the अदा(द-गणः।

उदाहरणम ्– अ�" (√अe, अदा(द-गणः, अदँ भMणे, धात-ुपाठः #२. १) लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-पुSषः,


The ending उकारः of the धातःु-√अe has a उदा"-�वरः। Thus the √अe-धातुः is devoid of any

indications for bringing in आYमनेपद-]Yयया:। (Neither 1-3-12 अनदुा"�ङत आYमनेपदम ् nor 1-3-

95

72 �वjरत�ञतः क��Lभ]ाये w:याफले applies.) Therefore, as per 1-3-78 शेषात ् कत�jर पर�मैपदम,्

the √अe-धातुः, in कत�jर ]योग:, will take the पर�मैपद-]Yयया: by default.

अe + लँt 3-2-123 = अe + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= अe + 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-100, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= अe + 1त 1-3-3 = अe + शप ् + 1त 3-1-68, शप ् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= अe + 1त 2-4-72 = अ�" 8-4-55

364) 6-4-101 हुझ[kयो हे�ध�ः

व�ृ"ः होझ�ल� तेk यp च हे�ध�ः � यात।् The ‘(ह’ of ल¾t gets ‘�ध’ as replacement, when following the

verbal root √हु (हु दानादनयोः | आदाने चेYयेके | ]ीणनेऽपी1त भा�यम ्३. १) or when following a verbal

root ending in a letter of the झल-्]Yयाहारः।

उदाहरणम ्– अ�F (√अe, अदा(द-गणः, अदँ भMणे, धात-ुपाठः #२. १) ल¾t, कत�jर ]योगः, म_यम-पुSषः,


अe + ल¾t 3-3-162 = अe + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= अe + Lसप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-105, Lसप ् gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= अe + Lस 1-3-3 = अe + (ह 3-4-87, (ह also gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 1-1-56

= अe + शप ्+ (ह 3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113 = अe + (ह 2-4-72

= अ�F 6-4-101

365) 7-3-100 अदः सवHषाम ्

व�ृ"ः अदः पर� याप�ृसाव�धातुक� य अt � याY सव�मतेन । In the opinion of all the teachers, a साव�धातकु-

]Yययः that is अप�ृ: (ref. 1-2-41) takes the अt-आगमः when it follows the verbal root √अe (अदँ

भMणे २. १) ।

उदाहरणम ्– आदत ्(√अe, अदा(द-गणः, अदँ भMणे, धात-ुपाठः #२. १) लँE, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-पुSषः,


अe + लँE 3-2-111 = अe + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= अe + 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= अe + 1त 1-3-3 = अe + त ्3-4-100

= अe + शप ्+ त ्3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113 = अe + त ्2-4-72 =

अe + अt त ्7-3-100, 1-1-46

= अe + अ त ्1-3-3 = आt अदत ्6-4-72, 1-1-46 = आ अदत ्1-3-3 = आदत ्6-1-90

July 23rd 2011

366) वा�"�कम ् – इि�pतपौ धात1ुनदHशे इ1त व�{यम।् (under 3-3-108)

The affix ‘इक्’ as also the affix ‘िpतप’् may be used by पा6ण1न: to make reference to a धात:ु

(verbal root.)

96

उदाहरणम ्– in 2-4-72 अ(द]भ1ृतkयः शपः, पा6ण1न: has used ‘अ(द’ to refer to √अe (अदँ भMणे, धात-ु

पाठः #२. १)।

अe + इक् 3-3-108 वा�"�कम ्

= अ(द 1-3-3

उदाहरणम ्– in 8-2-19 उपसग��यायतौ, पा6ण1न: has used ‘अय1त’ to refer to √अय ्(अय-ँ [गतौ] १.

५४६)। Note: अयतौ is स`मी-एकवचनम ्of the ]ा1तप(दकम ्‘अय1त’।

अय ्+ िpतप ्3-3-108 वा�"�कम।् िpतप ्gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= अय ्+ शप ्+ िpतप ्3-1-68

= अय ्+ अ + 1त 1-3-8, 1-3-3

= अय1त

Note: The use of ‘िpतप’् to refer to a धातु: does not necessarily imply that the धातु: being referred

to is पर�मैपदI।√अय ्(अय-ँ [गतौ] १. ५४६) is आYमनेपदI।

367) 6-4-37 अनुदा"ोपदेशवन1ततनोYयादIनामननुाLसकलोपो झLल ि�ङ1त

व�ृ"ः अननुाLसका� तानामेषा ंवनतेp च लोपः � या� झलादौ wक1त �ङ1त परे । There is an elision of the

final nasal consonant of the verbal root √वन ्(वनँ श}दे १. ५३३, वनँ स|भ�ौ १. ५३४, वनुँ च नोrयते

१. ९१५) and of the verbal roots* which have अनदुा"-�वरः in the धात-ुपाठः as well as of the verbal

roots** belonging to the तना(द-गणः – when followed by a झला(द-]Yययः which is a wकत ्or a �ङत।्

Note: * LसFा�त-कौमुदI – ‘यLमरLमनLमगLमह1नम�यतयोऽनदुा"ोपदेशाः।’ The following six roots end in a

nasal consonant and have a अनदुा"-�वरः in the धात-ुपाठः।

√यम ्(यमँ उपरमे १. ११३९), √रम ्(रमँु :¸डायाम ्| रमँ इ1त माधवः १. ९८९), √नम ्(णमँ ]qYवे श}दे

च १. ११३६), √गम ्(गम ॢँ गतौ १. ११३७), √हन ्(हनँ (हसंागYयोः २. २) and √मन ्(मनँ Dाने ४. ७३)।

**The following eight roots belonging to तना(द-गणः are subject to this rule:

√तन ्(तनुँ �व�तारे ८. १), √Mण ्(Mणुँ (हसंायाम ् ८. ३), √¢Mण ्(¢Mणुँ [(हसंायाम]्च ८.

४), √ऋण ्(ऋणुँ गतौ ८. ५), √तणृ ्(तणृुँ अदने ८. ६), √घणृ ्(घणृुँ दI`ौ ८. ७), √वन ्(वनुँ याचने ८.

८) and √मन ्(मनुँ अवबोधने ८. ९)।

उदाहरणम ्– हतः (√हन,् अदा(द-गणः, हनँ (हसंागYयोः धात-ुपाठः #२. २ ) लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-पSुषः,

(aवचनम।्

हन ्+ लँt 3-4-69, 3-2-123

= हन ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3 = हन ्+ तस ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, तस ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा

by 3-4-113

= हन ्+ शप ्+ तस ्3-1-68, 1-3-4 = हन ्+ तस ्2-4-72

= ह + तस ्6-4-37 (तस ्is not a �पत ्and therefore it is �ङaत ्by 1-2-4) = हतः 8-2-66, 8-3-15

97

368) 6-4-98 गमहनजनखनघसां लोपः ि�ङYयन�ङ

व�ृ"ः एषामुपधाया लोपोऽजादौ ि�ङ1त न Y व�ङ। The उपधा (penultimate letter – ref. 1-1-65) of the

verbal roots √गम(्गम ॢँ गतौ १. ११३७), √हन ्(हनँ (हसंागYयोः २. २), √जन ्([जनी« ]ादभुा�वे ४. ४४],

[जनँ जनने ३. २५]), √खन ्(खनुँ अवदारणे १. १०२०) and √घस ्(घस ॢँ अदने १. ८१२) is elided, when

followed by a अजा(द-]Yययः (an affix beginning with a vowel) which is a wकत ्(has the letter ‘क्’ as

a इत)् or a �ङत ्(has the letter ‘E’ as a इत)् with the exclusion of the affix अE।

उदाहरणम ्– �नि�त (√हन,् अदा(द-गणः, हनँ (हसंागYयोः धात-ुपाठः #२. २ ) लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-

पुSषः, बहुवचनम।्

हन ्+ लँt 3-4-69, 3-2-123

= हन ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3 = हन ्+ 6झ 3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 6झ gets साव�धातुक-सCDा

by 3-4-113

= हन ्+ शप ्+ 6झ 3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113 = हन ्+ 6झ 2-4-72

= हन ्+ अि�त 7-1-3 = c न ्+ अि�त 6-4-98 (6झ is not a �पत ्and therefore it is �ङaत ्by 1-2-4) =

�नि�त 7-3-54

369) 6-4-36 ह�तेज�ः

व�ृ"ः हौ परे। When followed by the (ह-]Yययः, ‘हन’् gets ‘ज’ as the replacement.

उदाहरणम ्– ज(ह (√हन,् अदा(द-गणः, हनँ (हसंागYयोः धात-ुपाठः #२. २) ल¾t, कत�jर ]योगः, म_यम-


हन ्+ ल¾t 3-3-162 = हन ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3 = हन ्+ Lसप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-105, Lसप ्


= हन ् + Lस 1-3-3 = हन ् + (ह 3-4-87, (ह also gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 1-1-56

= हन ्+ शप ्+ (ह 3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113 = हन ्+ (ह 2-4-72 =

ज(ह 6-4-36, 1-1-55


370) 6-4-22 अLसFवद�ाभात ्

व�ृ"ः इत ऊ_व�मापादसमाX तेराभीयम,् समाना�ये ति� म� कत�{ ये तदLसFम ् । A आभीय-काय�म ् is any

operation/rule that is prescribed in the section starting from this rule (6-4-22) up to the end of the

भ�य-अ�धकारः (ref. 6-4-129), that is up to the end of the Sixth Chapter. When one आभीय-काय�म ्is

done based on a certain element, then it is considered अLसFम ्(as if it has not happened) in the

view of another आभीय-काय�म ्which is based on the same element.

Example continued from above.

98

ज(ह । Now by 6-4-105 अतो हेः, the (ह-]Yययः should have taken elision. Since both 6-4-36 and 6-

4-105 belong to the अ�धकारः of 6-4-22 अLसFवद�ाभात ्, the ज-आदेश: that was done by 6-4-36 is

not seen by 6-4-105. Only हन ्is seen by 6-4-105 and therefore there is no elision of the (ह-

]Yययः here and the form remains as ज(ह।

Note: Both 6-4-36 and 6-4-105 prescribe an operation that involves the (ह-]Yयय:। Since they are

both based on a common element, 6-4-22 comes into effect.

In आशीलÀt -

हन ्+ ल¾t (आLश�ष) 3-3-173 = हन ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= हन ्+ Lसप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-105, Lसप ्gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= हन ्+ Lस 1-3-3 = हन ्+ (ह 3-4-87, (ह also gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 1-1-56

= हन ्+ शप ्+ (ह 3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113 = हन ्+ (ह 2-4-72 =

हन ्+ तातE 7-1-35, 1-1-55 (Note: 7-1-35 is a 1नYयकाय�म ्(an invariable rule) and hence it has to

be given a chance to apply first – before 6-4-36 or 6-4-37.)

= हन ्+ तात ्(1-3-3, the अकारः before the ङकारः is उrचारणाथ�ः) = हतात ्6-4-37 (Note: 6-4-37 is a

परकाय�म ्(a later rule in the अ4ा_यायी) compared to 6-4-36. Therefore 6-4-36 was set aside in

favor of 6-4-37.)

371) 7-3-89 उतो व�ृFलु�wक हLल

व�ृ"ः लुि� वषये उतो व�ृFः �प1त हलादौ साव�धातकेु नY वk य� त� य । A root ending in s�व-उकारः whose

�वकरणः has taken लुक् (elision) gets व�ृFः as the आदेशः when followed by a हला(द-साव�धातुक-

]Yययः (a साव�धातुक-]Yययः beginning with a consonant) which is a �पत ्(has पकार: as a इत)्,

provided there is no reduplication (अkयासः)।

उदाहरणम ्– यौ1त (√यु, अदा(द-गणः, यु Lम�ेणे [अLम�णे च], धात-ुपाठः #२. २७ ) लँt, कत�jर ]योगः,

]थम-पुSषः, एकवचनम।्

The √यु-धातुः has no इत ्letters. It is devoid of any indications for bringing in आYमनेपद-]Yयया:।

(Neither 1-3-12अनुदा"�ङत आYमनेपदम ् nor 1-3-72 �वjरत�ञतः क��Lभ]ाये w:याफले applies.)

Therefore, as per 1-3-78 शेषात ्कत�jर पर�मैपदम,् the √यु-धातुः, in कत�jर ]योग:, will take the

पर�मैपद-]Yयया: by default.

यु + लँt 3-2-123 = यु + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= यु + 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-100, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ्gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= यु + 1त 1-3-3 = यु + शप ्+ 1त 3-1-68, शप ्gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= यु + 1त 2-4-72 = यौ1त 7-3-89

372) महाभा�यम ्– �पrच �ङ�न, �ङrच �प�न।

99

उदाहरणम ्– यतुात ्(√यु, अदा(द-गणः, यु Lम�ेणे [अLम�णे च], धात-ुपाठः #२. २७) ल¾t (आLश�ष), कत�jर

]योगः, ]थम-पSुषः, एकवचनम।्

यु + ल¾t (आLश�ष) 3-3-173 = यु + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= यु + 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= यु + 1त 1-3-3 = यु + त ु3-4-86

= यु + शप ्+ त ु3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113 = यु + त ु2-4-72

= यु + तातE 7-1-35, 1-1-55 = युतात ्1-3-3

The तातE-]Yययः is a �ङत।् By �था1नवe-भावः (ref. 1-1-56), ‘तातE’ (which has come in place of the

�पत-्]Yयय: ‘1तप’्) inherits the �पhवम ्(the status of being a �पत)् from the 1तप-्]Yयय:। Thus the

conditions for applying 7-3-89 are satisfied and the ending उकार: of the अEगम ्‘य’ु would take

व�ृF:। But as per the महाभा�यम ्– �पrच �ङ�न, �ङrच �प�न – that which is a �पत ्cannot be a �ङत ्

at the same time and that which is a �ङत ्cannot be a �पत ्at the same time. ‘तातE’ has been

specifically made a �ङत ्by पा6ण1न: by putting the ङकार: as an इत।् So it is साMात ्�ङत।् On the

other hand the �पhवम ्was inherited by �था1नवतe-भावः। The �ङhवम ्which is साMात ्has greater

force and it negates the �पhवम।् So now 7-3-89 (which requires the ]Yयय: to be �पत)् cannot

apply and hence there is no व�ृF: for the उकार: of ‘य’ु।

373) 3-4-111 लङः शाकटायन�यवै

व�ृ"ः आद� ताY पर� य लङो झेजु�स ्वा � यात।् Following a verbal root ending in a आकारः, the affix ‘6झ’

of लँE is optionally replaced by ‘जुस’्।

उदाहरणम ्– अयःु (√या, अदा(द-गणः, या ]ापणे, धात-ुपाठः #२. ४४) लँE, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-पुSषः,


The √या-धातुः has no इत ् letters. It is devoid of any indications for bringing in आYमनेपद-

]Yयया:। (Neither 1-3-12अनुदा"�ङत आYमनेपदम ्nor 1-3-72 �वjरत�ञतः क��Lभ]ाये w:याफले applies.)

Therefore, as per 1-3-78 शेषात ्कत�jर पर�मैपदम,् the √या-धातुः, in कत�jर ]योग:, will take the

पर�मैपद-]Yयया: by default.

या + लँE 3-2-111 = या + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= या + 6झ 3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 6झ gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= या + जुस ्3-4-111 = या + उस ्1-3-7, 1-3-4

= या + शप ्+ उस ्3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113 = या + उस ्2-4-72

= युस ्6-1-96 = अt युस ्6-4-71, 1-1-46 = अ युस ्1-3-3 = अयु: 8-2-66, 8-3-15

The ‘जुस’्-आदेश: prescribed by 3-4-111 is optional because it is only in the opinion of the teacher

शाकटायन:। In the opinion of the other teachers, there is no ‘जुस’्-आदेश: and we get the alternate

(usual) form अयान ्as follows:

100

अयान ्(√या, अदा(द-गणः, या ]ापणे, धात-ुपाठः #२. ४४) लँE, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-पुSषः, बहुवचनम।्

या + लँE 3-2-111 = या + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= या + 6झ 3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 6झ gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= या + झ ्3-4-100 = या + शप ्+ झ ्3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= या + झ ्2-4-72 = या + अ�त ्7-1-3 = या�त ्6-1-101 = अt या�त ्6-4-71, 1-1-46 = अ या�त ्1-3-3

= अयान ्8-2-23

374) 3-4-83 �वदो लटो वा

व�ृ"ः वे"ेल�टः पर� मैपदाना ंणलादयो वा � यःु। The affixes (‘1तप’्, ‘तस’् etc.) of लँt following the verbal

root √�वe (�वदँ Dाने २. ५९ ) optionally get the nine affixes ‘णल’्, ‘अतुस’् etc., as replacements

respectively.

Note: The nine पर� मैपद-]Yयया: [‘1तप’्, ‘तस’्, ‘6झ’, ‘Lसप’्, ‘थस’्, ‘थ’, ‘Lमप’्, ‘वस’्, ‘मस’्] of लँt optionally

get ‘णल’्, ‘अतुस’्, ‘उस’्, ‘थल’्, ‘अथुस’्, ‘अ’, ‘णल’्, ‘व’, ‘म’ as replacements. As per 1-3-10, the

substitutions are done respectively.

णल-्पM े

उदाहरणम ्– वेद (√�वe, अदा(द-गणः, �वदँ Dाने , धात-ुपाठः #२. ५९ ) लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-पुSषः,


�वe + लँt 3-2-123 = �वe + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= �वe + 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-100, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= �वe + णल ्3-4-83, 1-3-10, णल ्also gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 1-1-56 = �वe + अ 1-3-3, 1-3-7

= �वe + शप ्+ अ 3-1-68, शप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113 = �वe + अ 2-4-72 = वेद 7-3-86

णल-्अभावपM े

उदाहरणम ्– वे�" (√�वe, अदा(द-गणः, �वदँ Dाने, धात-ुपाठः #२. ५९ ) लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-पSुषः,


�वe + लँt 3-2-123 = �वe + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= �वe + 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-100, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= �वe + 1त 1-3-3 = �वe + शप ् + 1त 3-1-68, शप ् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= �वe + 1त 2-4-72 = वेe + 1त 7-3-86 = वे�" 8-4-55

375) 3-1-41�वदाEकुव�ि�YवYय�यतर�याम ्

व�ृ"ः वे"ेल\(ट आम ्गुणाभावो लोटो लुक् लोड� तकरोY यनु]योगp च वा 1नपाY यते। पSुषवचने न �वव¢Mते ।

When a ल¾t affix follows the verbal root �वe (�वदँ Dाने २. ५९), the following set of operations

shall be carried out optionally:

i) √�वe gets the आम-्]Yययः

ii) there is no गुणः (by 7-3-86) for the (उपधा) इकार: of √�वe<br< a=""> /> iii) the ल¾t-]Yययः

101

takes the लुक् elision

iv) </br<>√कृ (डुकृञ ्करणे ८. १०) with its ल¾t-]Yयय: is annexed.

This सू�म ्is not restricted to any particular case of पुSषः or वचनम।् (This means that this सू�म ्

applies in the case of each of the nine combinations of पSुषः and वचनम।्)

उदाहरणम ्– �वदाEकरोत ु(√�वe, अदा(द-गणः, �वदँ Dाने, धात-ुपाठः #२. ५९ ) ल¾t, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-


�वe+ ल¾t 3-3-162 = �वe+ आम ्+ कृ + ल¾t 3-1-41

= �वदाम ्+ कृ + 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ्gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= �वदाम ्+ कृ + 1त 1-3-3 = �वदाम ्+ कृ + त ु3-4-86

Example continued below…

376) 3-1-79 तना(दकृCkय उः

व�ृ"ः तनादेः कृञT उः ]Yययः �यात।् When a साव�धातुक-]Yययः signifying the agent follows, the

affix ‘उ’ is placed after the verbal root √कृ (डुकृञ ्करणे ८. १०) and also after a verbal root

belonging to the तना(द-गणः।

Note: 3-1-79 is अपवादः to 3-1-68 कत�jर शप ्।


�वदाम ्+ कृ + तु = �वदाम ्+ कृ + उ + त ु3-1-79, ‘उ’ gets आध�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-114

= �वदाम ्+ कर ्+ ओ + त ु7-3-84, 1-1-51 = �वदांकरोत ु8-3-23 = �वदाकंरोतु/�वदाEकरोत ु8-4-59

377) 6-4-110 अत उत ् साव�धातकेु

व�ृ"ः उ]Y यया� त� य कृञोऽकार� य उः � यात ्साव�धातुके ि�ङ1त । When √कृ (डुकृञ ्करणे ८. १०) ends

in the ‘उ’-]Yयय: and is followed by a साव�धातकु-]Yययः which is a wकत ्or a �ङत,् then there is a

substitution of उकारः in place of the अकारः (which is a result of गुणादेशः) of √कृ।

उदाहरणम ्– �वदाEकुSतात ्(√�वe, अदा(द-गणः, �वदँ Dाने, धात-ुपाठः #२. ५९) ल¾t (आLश�ष), कत�jर

]योगः, ]थम-पSुषः, एकवचनम।्

�वe+ ल¾t (आLश�ष) 3-3-173 = �वe+ आम ्+ कृ + ल¾t 3-1-41

= �वदाम ्+ कृ + 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ्gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= �वदाम ्+ कृ + 1त 1-3-3 = �वदाम ्+ कृ + त ु3-4-86

= �वदाम ्+ कृ + उ + त ु3-1-79, ‘उ’ gets आध�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-114

Optionally तु gets तातE-आदेशः

= �वदाम ्+ कृ + उ + तातE 7-1-35, 1-1-55

= �वदाम ्+ कृ + उ + तात ्1-3-3

= �वदाम ्+ कर ्+ उ + तात ्7-3-84, 1-1-51 (Note: Since तातE is a �ङत-्]Yययः, 1-1-5 stops the

102

गुणादेशः on ‘उ’ which would have been done by 7-3-84.)

= �वदाम ्+ कुSतात ्6-4-110 = �वदाकुंSतात ्8-3-23 = �वदांकुSतात/्�वदाEकुSतात ्8-4-59

378) 8-2-77 हLल च

व�ृ"ः रेफवा� त� य धातोSपधाया इको दIघ\ हLल । The penultimate (उपधा) इक् letter of a verbal root

ending in a वकारः or रेफः is elongated, when followed by a हल ्(consonant.)

उदाहरणम ्– �वदाEकुव��त ु(√�वe, अदा(द-गणः, �वदँ Dाने, धात-ुपाठः #२. ५९) ल¾t, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-

पुSषः, बहुवचनम।्

�वe + ल¾t 3-3-162 = �वe+ आम ्+ कृ + ल¾t 3-1-41

= �वदाम ्+ कृ + 6झ 3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 6झ gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= �वदाम ्+ कृ + झु 3-4-86

= �वदाम ्+ कृ + उ + झु 3-1-79, ‘उ’ gets आध�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-114

= �वदाम ्+ कृ + उ + अ�त ु7-1-3

= �वदाम ्+ कर ्+ उ + अ�त ु7-3-84, 1-1-51 (Note: Since the साव�धातुक-]Yयय: ‘अ�त’ु is अ�पत,् by 1-

2-4 it behaves �ङaत ्– as if it has ङकार: as a इत।् Therefore 1-1-5 stops the गुणादेशः on ‘उ’ which

would have been done by 7-3-84.)

= �वदाम ्+ कुर ्+ उ + अ�त ु6-4-110 = �वदाम ्+ कु र ्व ्+ अ�त ु6-1-77


379) 8-2-79 न भकुछु�राम ्

व�ृ"ः भ� य कुछु�रोp चोपधाया इको दIघ\ न � यात ्। The दIघा�देश: (prescribed by 8-2-77) for the

penultimate (उपधा) इक् letter of an अEगम ्does not take place in the following three cases:

i. The अEगम ्has the भ-सCDा or

ii. The अEगम ्is ‘कुर’् or

iii. The अEगम ्is ‘छुर’्।

Note: This is a 1नषेध-सू�म ्(negation) for 8-2-77.

Example continued from above..

�वदाम ्+ कु र ्व ्+ अ�त ु

Now, since the root ‘कुर’् ends in a रेफः and is followed by a हल ्(वकारः), the उपधा ‘उ’ would have

been made दIघ�ः by 8-2-77. But 8-2-79 stops this operation.

= �वदांकुव��त ु8-3-23 = �वदाकुंव��तु/�वदाEकुव��त ु8-4-59

380) 3-4-109 Lसजkय�त�व(दkयT

व�ृ"ः Lसचोऽkय�ताe �वदेT पर�य �ङYस|बि�धनो झेजु�स ्। There is a substitution of ‘जुस’् in place of

the ‘6झ’-]Yयय: that has come in place of a �ङत-्लकार: (a लकार: which has ङकार: as an इत)् in the

following three cases:

i. The ‘6झ’-]Yयय: follows the ‘Lसँच’्-]Yयय:

103

ii. The ‘6झ’-]Yयय: follows a term that has the अkय�त-सCDा

iii. The ‘6झ’-]Yयय: follows √�वe (�वदँ Dाने, धात-ुपाठः #२. ५९)

उदाहरणम ्– अ�वद:ु (√�वe, अदा(द-गणः, �वदँ Dाने, धात-ुपाठः #२. ५९) लँE, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-पुSषः,


�वe + लँE 3-2-111 = �वe + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= �वe + 6झ 3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 6झ gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= �वe + जुस ्3-4-109 = �वe + उस ्1-3-7, 1-3-4

= �वe + शप ्+ उस ्3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= �वe + उस ्2-4-72 (Note: Since the साव�धातुक-]Yयय: ‘उस’् is अ�पत,् by 1-2-4 it behaves �ङaत ्– as

if it has ङकार: as a इत।् Therefore 1-1-5 stops the गुणादेशः on the इकार: of ‘�वe’ which would

have been done by 7-3-86.)

= अt �वदसु ्6-4-71, 1-1-46 = अ�वदसु ्1-3-3

= अ�वद:ु 8-2-66, 8-3-15

381) 8-2-75 दT

व�ृ"ः धातोद�� य पदा� त� य Lस�प Sँवा� । The पदा�त-दकारः of a धातुः optionally gets ‘Sँ’ as the

replacement when followed by the affix ‘Lसप’्।

उदाहरणम ्– अवेः (√�वe, अदा(द-गणः, �वदँ Dाने, धात-ुपाठः #२. ५९) लँE, कत�jर ]योगः, म_यम-पSुषः,


�वe + लँE 3-2-111 = �वe + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= �वe + Lसप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-105, Lसप ्gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= �वe + Lस 1-3-3 = �वe + स ्3-4-100

= �वe + शप ्+ स ्3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= �वe + स ्2-4-72 = वेe + स ्7-3-86 = वेe 6-1-68

= अt वेe 6-4-71, 1-1-46 = अवेe 1-3-3 = अवेSँ 1-1-62, 8-2-75 = अवेर ्1-3-2

= अवेः 8-3-15

Note: 8-2-75 is an optional rule. When the ‘Sँ’-आदेश: is not done, then the (usual) from will be

अवेत/्अवेe।

382) 6-4-111 �सोर[लोपः

व�ृ"ः p न� या� तेp चातो लोपः साव�धातकेु ि�ङ1त। The letter ‘अ’ of ‘�’ (of the affix ‘�म’्) and of the

verbal root √अस ्(असँ भु�व २. ६०) is elided when followed by a साव�धातुकम ्affix which is a wकत ्

(has the letter ‘क्’ as a इत)् or a �ङत ् (has the letter ‘E’ as a इत)्।

Note: ‘�’ refers to the affix ‘�म’् (ref. 3-1-78 Sधा(दkयः �म)्।

104

उदाहरणम ्– �तः (√अस,् अदा(द-गणः, असँ भु�व, धात-ुपाठः #२. ६०) लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-पSुषः,


अस ्+ लँt 3-2-123 = अस ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= अस ् + तस ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, तस ् gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= अस ् + तस ्1-3-4 = अस ् + शप ् + तस ्3-1-68, शप ् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= अस ्+ तस ्2-4-72 = �तस ्6-4-111 (Note: Since the साव�धातुक-]Yयय: ‘तस’् is अ�पत,् by 1-2-4 it

behaves �ङaत ्– as if it has ङकार: as a इत।् This allows 6-4-111 to apply) = �तः 8-2-66, 8-3-15.

383) 7-4-50 तास�Yयोल\पः

व�ृ"ः तासेर�तेT स�य लोप��यात ्सादौ ]Yयये परे। When followed by an affix beginning with a

सकार:, there is a लोप: elision of the सकार: of the ‘तास’्-]Yयय: and of √अस ्(असँ भु�व २. ६०)।

उदाहरणम ्– अLस (√अस,् अदा(द-गणः, असँ भु�व, धात-ुपाठः #२. ६०) लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, म_यम-पुSषः,


अस ्+ लँt 3-2-123 = अस ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= अस ्+ Lसप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-105, Lसप ्gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= अस ्+ Lस 1-3-3 = अस ्+ शप ्+ Lस 3-1-68, शप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= अस ्+ Lस 2-4-72 = अLस 7-4-50

384) 6-4-119 �वसोरेFावkयासलोपT

व�ृ"ः घोर�तेT एhवं �याFौ परे अkयासलोपT। When the ‘(ह’-]Yयय: follows, there is a substitution of

एकार: in place of a धातु: that has the घ-ुसCDा and also in place of √अस ्(असँ भु�व #२. ६०)।

Simultaneously there is a लोप: of the अkयास: (if any.)

Note: As per the पjरभाषा-सू�म ्1-1-52 अलोऽ�Yय�य, only the ending letter (अल)् of the धातु: is

replaced by a एकार:। But the entire अkयासः – and not just the ending letter – takes लोपः। The

reason for this is that in the सू�म ्6-4-119, पा6ण1नः says अkयासलोपः in spite of the अनवु�ृ"ः of लोपः

being available from the prior सू�म।् This repetition of the term लोपः is taken as an indication that

the entire अkयासः should be elided.

उदाहरणम ्– ए�ध (√अस,् अदा(द-गणः, असँ भु�व, धात-ुपाठः #२. ६०) ल¾t, कत�jर ]योगः, म_यम-पSुषः,


अस ्+ ल¾t 3-3-162 = अस ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= अस ्+ Lसप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-105, Lसप ्gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= अस ्+ Lस 1-3-3 = अस ्+ (ह 3-4-87

= अस ्+ शप ्+ (ह 3-1-68, शप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= अस ्+ (ह 2-4-72

= अ ए + (ह 6-4-119, 1-1-52

= अ ए + �ध 6-4-101 (Note: Due to 6-4-22, the एकारादेश: done by 6-4-119 is not seen by 6-4-101.

105

It still sees a सकार: and therefore applies.)

= ए�ध 6-4-111 (Note: Since the साव�धातकु-]Yयय: ‘(ह’ is अ�पत ्(by 3-4-87), by 1-2-4 it behaves

�ङaत ्– as if it has ङकार: as a इत।् This allows 6-4-111 to apply.)

385) 7-3-96 अि�तLसचोऽप�ेृ

व�ृ"ः �वuमानात ् Lसचोऽ�तेT पर�याप�ृ�य हल ईडागमः। A अप�ृ-हल ् (affix which is a single

consonant – ref. 1-2-41अप�ृ एकाल ्]Yययः) takes the ‘ईt’ augment in the following two cases:

i. The अप�ृ-हल ् follows the ‘Lसँच’्-]Yयय: which is actually present or

ii. The अप�ृ-हल ्follows √अस ्(असँ भु�व, धात-ुपाठः #२. ६०) which is actually present.

उदाहरणम ्– आसीत ्(√अस,् अदा(द-गणः, असँ भु�व, धात-ुपाठः #२. ६०) लँE, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-पSुषः,


अस ्+ लँE 3-2-111 = अस ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= अस ्+ 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ्gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= अस ्+ 1त 1-3-3 = अस ्+ त ्3-4-100

= अस ्+ शप ्+ त ्3-1-68, शप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113.

= अस ्+ त ्2-4-72

= अस ्+ ईt त ्7-3-96, 1-1-46

= अस ्+ ईत ्1-3-3

= आt अस ्+ ईत ्6-4-72, 1-1-46

= आ अस ्+ ईत ्1-3-3

= आसीत ्6-1-90

386) 6-4-81 इणो यण ्

व�ृ"ः अजादौ ]Y यये परे । The verbal root √इ (इण ्गतौ #२. ४०), gets a यण ्letter (यकारः) as the

replacement when followed by an अजा(द-]Yयय: (vowel-beginning affix).

Note: The ‘यण’्-आदेश: prescribed by this सू�म ्is an अपवाद: for the ‘इयEँ’-आदेश: that would have

been done by 6-4-77.

But it is not a अपवाद: for the गुणादेश: prescribed by 7-3-84 because of the following पjरभाषा -

म_येऽपवादा: पूवा�न ्�वधीन ्बाध�ते नो"रान।्

‘Exceptions which are situation in the middle apply only to the prior rules and not the later rules.’

उदाहरणम ् – यि�त (√इ, अदा(द-गणः, इण ् गतौ, धात-ुपाठः #२. ४०) लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-पुSषः,


इ + लँt 3-2-123 = इ + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= इ + 6झ 3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 6झ gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= इ + शप ्+ 6झ 3-1-68, शप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113.

= इ + 6झ 2-4-72 = इ + अि�त 7-1-3 (Note: ‘अि�त’ is a अ�पत-्साव�धातुक-]Yयय: and hence it it �ङe-

106

वत ्by 1-2-4. Therefore, 1-1-5 blocks the गुणादेश: that would have been done by 7-3-84) = य ्+

अि�त 6-4-81 = यि�त।

387) 7-4-21 शीङः साव�धातकेु गुणः

व�ृ"ः शीङोऽEग�य साव�धातकेु परतो गुणो भव1त। The verbal root √शी (शीE �वXने २. २६) takes the

गुण: substitution when a साव�धातकुम ् affix follows.

Note: This सू�म ्is an अपवाद: for 1-1-5 ि��ङ1त च।

उदाहरणम ्– शेते (√शी, अदा(द-गणः, शीE �वXने, धात-ुपाठः #२. २६) लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-पSुषः,


The धातःु √शी is a �ङत ् (has ङकारः as a इत ् letter)। Thus by 1-3-12 अनदुा"�ङत

आYमनेपदम,् √शी will get आYमनेपद-]Yययाः।

शी + लँt 3-2-123 = शी + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= शी + त 3-4-78, 1-4-100, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, त gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= शी + ते 3-4-79 = शी + शप ् + ते 3-1-68, शप ् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113.

= शी + ते 2-4-72 = शेते 7-4-21 (Note: ‘ते’ is a अ�पत-्साव�धातुक-]Yयय: and hence it it �ङe-वत ्by 1-2-

4. Therefore, in the absence of 7-4-21, the गुणादेश: could not have been done by 7-3-

84 because 1-1-5 would have blocked it.)

388) 7-1-5 आYमनेपदे�वनतः

व�ृ"ः अनकाराY पर� याY मनेपदेषु झ� य अ(दY यादेशः � यात ्। The झकारः of a आYमनेपद-]Yययः gets ‘अत’्

as the replacement when following an अEगम ् that does not end in अकारः।

Note: Since ‘अत’् is an आदेश: (substitute) in place of the झकार: of the झ-]Yयय: (which has the

�वभ��-सCDा by1-4-104), ‘अत’् also gets the �वभ��-सCDा by 1-1-56. Hence 1-3-4 prevents the

ending तकार: of ‘अत’् from getting the इत-्सCDा।

उदाहरणम ्– शेरते (√शी, अदा(द-गणः, शीE �वXने, धात-ुपाठः #२. २६) लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-पुSषः,


शी + लँt 3-2-123 = शी + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= शी + झ 3-4-78, 1-4-100, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, झ gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= शी + झे 3-4-79 = शी + शप ् + झे 3-1-68, शप ् gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113.

= शी + झे 2-4-72 = शे + झे 7-4-21 = शे + अते 7-1-5


389) 7-1-6 शीङो St

व�ृ"ः शीडः पर� य झादेश� यातो Sडागमः � यात ्। When following the verbal root √शी (शीE �वXने २. २६), the ‘अत’् which comes in the place of the झकारः of a ]Yययः takes the augment ‘Sँt’।


107

शे + अते = शे + Sँt अते 7-1-6, 1-1-46 = शेरते 1-3-2, 1-3-3

390) 8-2-40 झष�तथोध\ऽधः

व�ृ"ः झषः परयो�तथोध�ः � या�न त ुदधातेः। A तकारः or थकारः gets धकारः as the replacement, when

preceded by a letter of the झष-्]Yयाहारः with the exception of the धकारः belonging to the

धातःु √धा (डुधाञ ्धारणपोषणयोः | दान इYयXयेके ३. ११)।

उदाहरणम ्– दोि�ध (√दcु, अदा(द-गणः, दहँु ]पूरणे, धात-ुपाठः #२. ४) लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-पSुषः,


The इत ् letter (अकार:) of the धातःु √दcु has a �वjरत-�वरः। Therefore, as per 1-3-72, this

धातःु √दcु can take either पर�मैपद-]Yयया: or आYमनेपद-]Yयया:।

Let us consider the case where it takes a पर�मैपद-]Yयय:।

दcु + लँt 3-2-123 = दcु + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= दcु + 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ्gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= दcु + 1त 1-3-3 = दcु + शप ्+ 1त 3-1-68, शप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= दcु + 1त 2-4-72 = दोc + 1त 7-3-86 = दोघ ्+ 1त 8-2-32 = दोघ ्+ �ध 8-2-40

= दोि�ध 8-4-53

उदाहरणम ्– धो¢M (√दcु, अदा(द-गणः, दहँु ]पूरणे, धात-ुपाठः #२. ४) लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, म_यम-पुSषः,


दcु + लँt 3-2-123 = दcु + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= दcु + Lसप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-105, Lसप ्gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= दcु + Lस 1-3-3 = दcु + शप ्+ Lस 3-1-68, शप ्gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= दcु + Lस 2-4-72 = दोc + Lस 7-3-86 = दोघ ्+ Lस 8-2-32 = धोघ ्+ Lस 8-2-37

= धोघ ्+ �ष 8-3-59 = धोक् + �ष 8-4-55

= धो¢M

391) 8-3-13 ढो ढे लोपः

व�ृ"ः ढकार�य ढकारे परे लोप: �यात।् A ढकारः is elided if followed by a ढकारः।

Note: The situation of a ढकार: followed by a ढकार: only arises after applying 8-4-41. So even

though 8-3-13 is an earlier rule (compared to 8-4-41) in the ^�पादI, it has to be allowed (in spite

of 8-2-1) to see the operation done by 8-4-41, for otherwise 8-3-13 would become useless.

उदाहरणम ्– लIढे (√Lलc, अदा(द-गणः, Lलहँ आ�वादने, धात-ुपाठः #२. ६) लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-पुSषः,


The इत ् letter (अकार:) of the धातःु √Lलc has a �वjरत-�वरः। Therefore, as per 1-3-72, this

धातःु √Lलc can take either पर�मैपद-]Yयया: or आYमनेपद-]Yयया:।

108

Let us consider the case when a आYमनेपद-]Yयय: is used.

Lलc + लँt 3-2-123 = Lलc + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= Lलc + त 3-4-78, 1-4-100, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, त gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= Lलc + ते 3-4-79

= Lलc + शप ्+ ते 3-1-68, शप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= Lलc + ते 2-4-72 = Lल� + ते 8-2-31

= Lल� + धे 8-2-40

= Lल� + ढे 8-4-41

= Lल + ढे 8-3-13 (वचनसाम या�त)्

= लIढे 6-3-111 (वचनसाम या�त)्

392) 8-2-41 षढोः कः Lस

व�ृ"ः षकारढकारयोः ककारादेशो भव1त सकारे परतः। A षकारः or a ढकारः is replaced by a ककार: if

followed by a सकारः।

उदाहरणम ्– LलMे (√Lलc, अदा(द-गणः, Lलहँ आ�वादने, धात-ुपाठः #२. ६) लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, म_यम-


Lलc + लँt 3-2-123 = Lलc + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= Lलc + थास ्3-4-78, 1-4-100, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-105, थास ्gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= Lलc + से 3-4-80

= Lलc + शप ्+ से 3-1-68, शप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= Lलc + से 2-4-72 = Lल� + से 8-2-31

= Lलक् + से 8-2-41

= Lलक् + षे 8-3-59

= LलM े

393) 3-4-84 »ुवः पCचानामा(दत आहो »ुवः

व�ृ"ः »ुवो लटि� तबादIना ंपCचाना ंणलादयः पCच वा � य»ुु�वp चाहादेशः । The first five affixes (1तप,् तस,्

6झ, Lसप,् थस)् of लँt following the verbal root √»ू (»ूञ ्{य�ाया ंवा�च २. ३९) optionally get the first

five णला(द-]Yययाः (णल,् अतुस,् उस,् थल,् अथुस)् as replacements. As per 1-3-10, the substitutions

are done respectively. Simultaneously, ‘»’ू takes the substitution ‘आc’।

The ञकार: at the end of ‘»ूञ’् is an इत ्by 1-3-3. Therefore, as per 1-3-72, this धातःु √»ू can take

either पर�मैपद-]Yयया: or आYमनेपद-]Yयया:।

Let us consider the case when a पर�मैपद-]Yयय: is used.

109

उदाहरणम ्– आह (√»ू, अदा(द-गणः, »ूञ ्{य�ायां वा�च, धात-ुपाठः #२. ३९) लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-


»ू + लँt 3-2-123 = »ू + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= »ू + 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= आc + णल ्3-4-84

= आc + शप ्+ णल ्3-1-68

= आc + णल ्2-4-72

= आc + अ 1-3-3, 1-3-7 = आह

394) 8-2-35 आह�थः

व�ृ"ः झLल परे। The हकारः of the verbal form ‘आc’ gets थकारः as the replacement when followed

by a letter of the झल-्]Yयाहारः।


आYथ (√»ू, अदा(द-गणः, »ञू ् {य�ायां वा�च, धात-ुपाठः #२. ३९) लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, म_यम-पSुषः,


»ू + लँt 3-2-123 = »ू + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= »ू + Lसप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-105, Lसप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= आc + थल ्3-4-84 = आc + थ 1-3-3

= आc + शप ्+ थ 3-1-68

= आc + थ 2-4-72

= आथ ्+ थ 8-2-35 = आYथ 8-4-55

In the case in which the optional ‘थल’्-आदेश: (by 3-4-84) is not done, the form will be »वी�ष (see

next सू�म)्।

395) 7-3-93 »ुव ईt

व�ृ"ः »ुवः पर� य हलादेः �पतः साव�धातकु�य ईt � यात ्। When preceded by the verbal root √»ू (»ूञ ्{य�ायां वा�च २. ३९), a साव�धातुक-]Yययः which is हला(द: (beginning with a consonant) and is a

�पत,् gets ईt as the augment.

उदाहरणम ्– »वी1त (√»ू, अदा(द-गणः, »ूञ ्{य�ायां वा�च, धात-ुपाठः #२. ३९) लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-


This is the case in which the optional ‘णल’्-आदेश: (by 3-4-84) is not done.

»ू + लँt 3-2-123 = »ू + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= »ू + 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= »ू + 1त 1-3-3

= »ू + शप ्+ 1त 3-1-68

110

= »ू + 1त 2-4-72

= »ू + ईt 1त 7-3-93, 1-1-46

= »ू + ई 1त 1-3-3

= »ो + ई 1त 7-3-84 = »वी1त 6-1-78

396) 2-4-75 जुहोYया(दkयः /ुः

व�ृ"ः शपः p लुः � यात ्। The ‘शप’्-]Yयय: following the verbal roots ‘हु’ etc. gets ‘/ु’ (elision).

उदाहरणम ्– जुहो1त (√हु, जुहोYया(द-गणः, हु दानादनयोः । आदाने चेYयेके । ]ीणनेऽपी1त भा�यम,् धात-ु

पाठः #३. १) लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-पुSषः, एकवचनम।्

हु + लँt 3-2-123 = हु + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= हु + 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= हु + शप ्+ 1तप ्3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= हु + शप ्+ 1त 1-3-3 = हु + 1त 2-4-75

उदाहरणम ्– continued below

397) 6-1-10 /ौ

व�ृ"ः धातोaH � तः । A verbal root when followed by ‘/ु’ gets reduplicated.

उदाहरणम ्– continued from above

हु + 1त = हु + हु + 1त 6-1-10

continued below

398) 6-1-4 पूव\ऽkयासः

व�ृ"ः अ� ये aे �व(हते तयोः पूव\ऽkयाससंDः �यात ्। With regard to the reduplication prescribed in

this section (from 6-1-1 to 6-1-12), the first of the two parts gets the name अkयास: (reduplicate.)

399) 7-4-62 कुहोTुः

व�ृ"ः अk यासकवग�हकारयोp चवगा�देशः । In a reduplicate (अkयासः – ref. 6-1-4 पूव\ऽkयासः), a letter of

the कवग�ः or हकारः is replaced by a letter of the चवग�ः । The substitutions take place as per 1-1-

50 �थानेऽ�तरतमः।

(क्, ख,् ग,् घ,् E, c) are replaced by (च,् l, ज,् झ,् ञ,् झ)् respectively.


हु + हु + 1त = झु + हु + 1त 7-4-62, 1-1-50

= झु + हो + 1त 7-3-84, 3-4-113

111

continued below

400) 8-4-54 अkयासे चच�

व�ृ"ः अk यासे झलां चरः � यजु�शp च । In a reduplicate (अkयासः – ref. 6-1-4 पूव\ऽkयासः), a letter of

the झल-्]Yयाहारः is substituted by a letter of the चर-्]Yयाहारः or जश-्]Yयाहारः। The substitutions

take place as per 1-1-50�थानेऽ�तरतमः।


झु + हो + 1त = जुहो1त 8-4-54, 1-1-50

401) 7-1-4 अदkय�तात ्

व�ृ"ः झ� याY � यात ्। The झकारः of a ]Yययः that follows a reduplicated (ref. 6-1-5 उभे अkय�तम)्

root is substituted by ‘अत’्।

Note: Since ‘अत’् is an आदेश: (substitute) in place of the झकार: of the 6झ-]Yयय: which has the

�वभ��-सCDा by 1-4-104, ‘अत’् also gets the �वभ��-सCDा by 1-1-56. Hence 1-3-4 prevents the

ending तकार: of ‘अत’् from getting the इत-्सCDा।

उदाहरणम ्– जुq1त (√हु, जुहोYया(द-गणः, हु दानादनयोः । आदाने चेYयेके । ]ीणनेऽपी1त भा�यम,् धात-ु

पाठः #३. १) लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-पुSषः, बहुवचनम।्

हु + लँt 3-2-123 = हु + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= हु + 6झ 3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 6झ gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= हु + शप ्+ 6झ 3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= हु + 6झ 2-4-75 = हु + हु + 6झ 6-1-10

= झु + हु + 6झ 7-4-62, 1-1-50

= झुहु + अत ्इ 7-1-4, ‘झुहु’ has अkय�तसCDा by 6-1-5

= झुc व ्+ अत ्इ 6-4-87 = जुq1त 8-4-54, 1-1-50

Sept 10th 2011

402) 7-3-83 जुLस च

व�ृ"ः इग� ताEग� य गुणोऽजादौ जुLस । There is a गुण: substitute for the (ending letter of an) अEगम ्

ending in a letter of the इक्-]Yयाहारः, when followed by the affix जुस ्which begins with a vowel.

उदाहरणम ्– अजुहवुः (√हु, जुहोYया(द-गणः, हु दानादनयोः । आदाने चेYयेके । ]ीणनेऽपी1त भा�यम,् धात-ु

पाठः #३. १) लँE, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-पुSषः, बहुवचनम।्

हु + लँE 3-2-111 = हु + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= हु + 6झ 3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 6झ gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= हु + जुस ्3-4-109 = हु + उस ्1-3-7, 1-3-4

= हु + शप ्+ उस ्3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

112

= हु + उस ्2-4-75 = हु + हु + उस ्6-1-10

= झु + हु + उस ्7-4-62, 1-1-50

= झुहो + उस ्7-3-83

= झुहवुस ्6-1-78

= अt झुहवुस ्6-4-71, 1-1-46

= अझुहवुस ्1-3-3

= अझुहवःु 8-2-66, 8-3-15

= अजुहवःु 8-4-54, 1-1-50

403) 7-4-59 s�वः

व�ृ"ः अk यास�याचो s� वः � यात ् । The अच ् (vowel) of a reduplicate (अkयासः – ref. 6-1-

4 पूव\ऽkयासः) is substituted by a short vowel.

उदाहरणम ्– ^बभीतः/^बLभतः (√भी जुहोYया(द-गणः, �ञभी भये, धात-ुपाठः #३. २) लँt, कत�jर ]योगः,

]थम-पुSषः, (aवचनम।्

भी + लँt 3-2-123 = भी + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= भी + तस ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, तस ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= भी + शप ्+ तस ्3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= भी + तस ्2-4-75 = भी + भी + तस ्6-1-10

= Lभ भी + तस ्7-4-59

Since the ]Yयय: ‘तस’् is a साव�धातुक-]Yयय: that is अ�पत ्(does not have पकार: as an इत)्, it

becomes �ङत-्वत ्(as if it has ङकार: as an इत)् by 1-2-4. Hence 1-1-5 ि��ङ1त च prevents the

गुणादेश: which would have been done by7-3-84 साव�धातकुाध�धातुकयोः।


404) 6-4-115 Lभयोऽ�यतर�याम ्

व�ृ"ः इकारो वा � याFलादौ ि�ङ1त साव�धातकेु । The ईकारः of the धातःु √भी (�ञभी भये #३. २) is

optionally replaced by a इकारः, when a हला(द: (beginning with a consonant) साव�धातुक-]Yययः

which is a wकत ्or a �ङत ्follows.


Lभ भी + तस ्= Lभभीतः 8-2-66, 8-3-15 = ^बभीतः 8-4-54, 1-1-50

Optionally when 6-4-115 applies, we get

Lभ भी + तस ् = Lभ Lभ तस ्6-4-115 = LभLभतः 8-2-66, 8-3-15

= ^बLभतः 8-4-54, 1-1-50

405) 7-4-77 अ1त��पपYय\T

व�ृ"ः अk यास� य इकारोऽ� तादेशः � यात ्p लौ । When ‘/ु’ follows, इकारः is substituted for the ending

113

vowel of a reduplicate (अkयासः – ref. 6-1-4 पूव\ऽkयासः) of √ऋ (ऋ- [गतौ] #३. १७) and √पॄ (पॄ

पालनपूरणयोः #३. ४) ।

Note: Since the आदेश: ‘इ’ is being done in place of ‘पॄ’ (or ‘ऋ’) which is not a term which has

meaning, the सू�म1्-1-52 अलोऽ�Yय�य would not have applied here. But since this आदेश: involves

a operation on a अkयास: (ref. 6-1-4 पवू\ऽkयासः), the सू�म ्1-1-52 अलोऽ�Yय�य does apply. This is

as per the following पjरभाषा -

नानथ�केऽलो�Yय�व�धरनkयास�वकारे।

This means that the rule 1-1-52 अलोऽ�Yय�य does not apply in the case of a term that is devoid of

meaning, except in the case which involves modification of an अkयास:।

उदाहरणम ्– �पप1त � (√पॄ, जहुोYया(द-गणः, पॄ पालनपूरणयोः, धात-ुपाठः #३. ४) लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-


पॄ + लँt 3-2-123 = पॄ + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= पॄ + 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= पॄ + 1त 1-3-3

= पॄ + शप ्+ 1त 3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= पॄ + 1त 2-4-75 = पॄ + पॄ + 1त 6-1-10

= �पर ्+ पॄ + 1त 7-4-77, 1-1-51


406) 7-4-60 हला(दः शेषः

व�ृ"ः अk यास� या(दह�ल ्Lश� यते, अन ् ये हलो लुX य� ते । Of the consonants of a reduplicate (अkयासः –

ref. 6-1-4पूव\ऽkयासः), only the one (if any) at the beginning is retained, the rest are elided.

उदाहरणम ्– Example continued from above

�पर ्+ पॄ + 1त = �प + पॄ + 1त 7-4-60

= �पप1त � 7-3-84, 1-1-51

407) 7-1-100 ॠत इFातोः

व�ृ"ः ॠद� त� य धातोरEग� य इY � यात ्। The ending ॠकारः of a verbal root that has the अEग-सCDा

is substituted by इकारः।

उदाहरणम ्– �पपूत�ः (√पॄ, जहुोYया(द-गणः, पॄ पालनपूरणयोः, धात-ुपाठः #३. ४) लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-

पुSषः, (aवचनम।्

पॄ + लँt 3-2-123 = पॄ + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= पॄ + तस ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, तस ्gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= पॄ + शप ्+ तस ्3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= पॄ + तस ्2-4-75 = पॄ + पॄ + तस ्6-1-10

114

= �पर ्+ पॄ + तस ्7-4-77, 1-1-51 = �प + पॄ + तस ्7-4-60. Since the ]Yयय: ‘तस’् is a साव�धातकु-

]Yयय: that is अ�पत ्(does not have पकार: as an इत)्, it becomes �ङत-्वत ्(as if it has ङकार: as an

इत)् by 1-2-4. Hence 1-1-5 ि��ङ1त च prevents the गुणादेश: which would have been done by 7-3-

84 साव�धातुकाध�धातकुयोः।

Now, by 7-1-100, the ending ॠकारः of the अEगम ्‘�पपॄ’ should have been substituted by इकारः।

But instead the special rule 7-1-102 (below) applies. 7-1-102 is a अपवादः (exception) to 7-1-

100 ॠत इFातोः।


408) 7-1-102 उदो°यपवू��य

व�ृ"ः अEगावयवौ°यपवू\ य ॠत ्तद� त� याEग� य उत ्� यात ् । The ending ॠकारः of an अEगम ् is

substituted by उकारः, when preceded by a labial consonant (औ°य-वण�ः) belonging to the अEगम।्


�प + पॄ + तस ्= �प + पुर ्+ तस ्7-1-102, 1-1-51

= �प + पूर ्+ तस ्8-2-77 = �पपतू�ः 8-2-66, 8-3-15

409) 6-4-116 जहातेT

व�ृ"ः इaा � याFलादौ ि�ङ1त साव�धातकेु । The आकारः of the धातःु √हा (ओहाक् Yयागे #३.९) is

optionally replaced by इकारः when followed by हला(द: (beginning with a consonant) साव�धातुक-

]Yययः which is a wकत ्or a �ङत ्।

उदाहरणम ्– ज(हतः (√हा, जुहोYया(द-गणः, ओ«हाक् Yयागे, धात-ुपाठः #३.९) लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-पुSषः,


हा + लँt 3-2-123 = हा + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= हा + तस ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, तस ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= हा + शप ्+ तस ्3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= हा + तस ्2-4-75 = हा + हा + तस ्6-1-10

= झा + हा + तस ्7-4-62, 1-1-50 = झ + हा + तस ्7-4-59

= झ + (ह + तस ्6-4-116 (Note: Since the साव�धातुक-]Yयय: ‘तस’् is अ�पत,् by 1-2-4 it behaves

�ङaत ्– as if it has ङकार: as a इत।् This allows 6-4-116 to apply.)

= झ(हतः 8-2-66, 8-3-15

= ज(हतः 8-4-54, 1-1-50


410) 6-4-113 ई ह[यघोः

115

व�ृ"ः p नाk य� तयोरात ईत ्� यात ्साव�धातुके ि�ङ1त हलादौ न तु घोः । When followed by a हला(द:

(beginning with a consonant) साव�धातुक-]Yययः which is a wकत ्or a �ङत,् the आकारः of the �ा-

]Yययः or of a reduplicated root (अkय�तम)् is substituted by ईकारः excepting the आकारः of the

verbal roots having the घ-ुसCDा ।


The इकारादेश: (as shown above) done by 6-4-116 is optional. In the case where the इकारादेश: is

not done we get:

झ + हा + तस ्

= झ + हI + तस ्6-4-113 (Note: Since the साव�धातुक-]Yयय: ‘तस’् is अ�पत,् by 1-2-4 it behaves

�ङaत ्– as if it has ङकार: as a इत।् This allows 6-4-113 to apply)

= झहIतः 8-2-66, 8-3-15

= जहIतः 8-4-54, 1-1-50

Thus there are two possible final forms ज(हतः/जहIतः।

411) 6-4-112 �ाऽkय�तयोरातः

व�ृ"ः अनयोरातो लोपः ि�ङ1त साव�धातकेु । When followed by a साव�धातुक-]Yययः which is a wकत ्or a

�ङत,् the आकारः of the �ा-]Yययः or of a reduplicated root (अkय�तम)् is elided.

उदाहरणम ्– जह1त (√हा, जहुोYया(द-गणः, ओ«हाक् Yयागे, धात-ुपाठः #३.९), लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-पुSषः,


हा + लँt 3-2-123 = हा + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= हा + 6झ 3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 6झ gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= हा + शप ्+ 6झ 3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= हा + 6झ 2-4-75 = हा + हा + 6झ 6-1-10

= झा + हा + 6झ 7-4-62, 1-1-50

= झ + हा + 6झ 7-4-59

= झ + हा + अत ्इ 7-1-4

= झह1त 6-4-112 (Note: Since the साव�धातकु-]Yयय: ‘अत ्इ’ is अ�पत,् by 1-2-4 it behaves �ङaत ्– as

if it has ङकार: as a इत।् This allows 6-4-112 to apply.)

= जह1त 8-4-54, 1-1-50

412) 6-4-117 आ च हौ

व�ृ"ः जहातेह� परे आ � याr चा(ददIतौ । The आकारः of the धातःु √हा (ओ«हाक् Yयागे #३.९) is

substituted by आकारः when the (ह-]Yयय: follows. The term ‘च’ in the सू�म ् implies that the

substitute may also be इकार: (by 6-4-116) or ईकार: (by 6-4-113.)

116

उदाहरणम ् – जहा(ह/ज(ह(ह/जहI(ह (√हा, जुहोYया(द-गणः, ओ«हाक् Yयागे, धात-ुपाठः #३.९), ल¾t, कत�jर

]योगः, म_यम-पुSषः, एकवचनम।्

हा + ल¾t 3-3-162 = हा + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= हा + Lसप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-105, Lसप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= हा + Lस 1-3-3, 1-3-9 = हा + (ह 3-4-87

= हा + शप ्+ (ह 3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= हा + (ह 2-4-75 = हा + हा + (ह 6-1-10

= झा + हा + (ह 7-4-62, 1-1-50 = झ + हा + (ह 7-4-59

= झ + हा + (ह Here आकारः is replaced by आकारः by 6-4-117

= जहा(ह 8-4-54, 1-1-50

The substitute for the आकार: may also optionally be इकार: or ईकार:। So we get three possible

final forms:

जहा(ह/ज(ह(ह/जहI(ह 6-4-117

413) 6-4-118 लोपो 1य

व�ृ"ः जहातेरा[लोपो यादौ साव�धातकेु । The आकारः of the धातःु √हा (ओ«हाक् Yयागे #३.९) is elided

when followed by यकारा(द: (beginning with यकारः) साव�धातकु-]Yययः।

उदाहरणम ्– जfात ्(√हा, जुहोYया(द-गणः, ओ«हाक् Yयागे, धात-ुपाठः #३.९), �व�धLलँE, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-


हा + LलँE 3-3-161 = हा + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= हा + 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= हा + 1त 1-3-3 = हा + त ्3-4-100 = हा + यासुt त ्3-4-103, 1-1-46 = हा + यास ्त ्1-3-3

= हा + शप ्+ यास ्त ्3-1-68

= हा + यास ्त ्2-4-75 = हा + हा + यास ्त ्6-1-10

= झा + हा + यास ्त ्7-4-62, 1-1-50 = झ + हा + यास ्त ्7-4-59

= झ + हा + या त ्7-2-79 = झc + यात ्6-4-118 = जfात ्8-4-54, 1-1-50

September 24th, 2011

414) 7-4-76 भञृाLमत ्

व�ृ"ः ‘भञृ’् ‘माE’ ‘ओहाE’ एषा ं�याणामk यास� य इY � याrÅलौ । When followed by ‘/ु’, the ending letter

of a reduplicate (अkयासः – ref. 6-1-4 पूव\ऽkयासः) of √भ ृ(डुभञृ ्धारणपोषणयोः #३. ६), √मा (माE

माने श}दे च #३. ७) and √हा (ओहाE गतौ #३.८) gets replaced by a इकारः।

गीतासु उदाहरणम ्– /ोकः Bg15-17 – ^बभ1त � √भ ृ(जहुोYया(द-गणः, डुभञृ ्धारणपोषणयोः, धात-ुपाठः #३.

६), लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-पुSषः, एकवचनम।्

117

The ‘डु’ at the beginning of this धातुः gets इत-्सCDा by 1-3-5 आ(द�ञ�टुडवः। The ञकारः at the end

gets इत-्सCDा by 1-3-3 हल�Yयम।् Both take लोप: by 1-3-9 त�य लोपः। Since this धातु: has ञकारः

as an इत,् as per 1-3-72�वjरत�ञतः क��Lभ]ाये w:याफले, it is उभयपदI।


भ ृ+ लँt 3-2-123 = भ ृ+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= भ ृ+ 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= भ ृ+ 1त 1-3-3

= भ ृ+ शप ्+ 1त 3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= भ ृ+ 1त 2-4-75 = भ ृ+ भ ृ+ 1त 6-1-10

= Lभर ्+ भ ृ+ 1त 7-4-76, 1-1-51 = Lभ + भ ृ+ 1त 7-4-60

= Lभ + भर ्+ 1त 7-3-84, 1-1-51 = ^बभ1त � 8-4-54, 1-1-50

415) 8-2-38 दध�तथोT

व�ृ"ः (aS�� य झष� त� य धाञो बशो भष ्� या"थो: � _ वोp च परतः । A letter of the बश-्]Yयाहारः of the

reduplicated verbal root √धा (जुहोYया(द-गणः, डुधाञ ्धारणपोषणयोः | दान इYयXयेके ३. ११) ending in

a letter of the झष-्]Yयाहारः, is substituted by a letter of the भष-्]Yयाहारः, when followed by an affix

beginning with a तकारः, थकारः, सकारः or the term ‘_व’।

उदाहरणम ्– ध"ः √धा (जुहोYया(द-गणः, डुधाञ ्धारणपोषणयोः | दान इYयXयेके ३. ११), लँt, कत�jर ]योगः,

]थम-पुSषः, (aवचनम।्

The ‘डु’ at the beginning of this धातुः gets इत-्सCDा by 1-3-5 आ(द�ञ�टुडवः। The ञकारः at the end

gets इत-्सCDा by 1-3-3 हल�Yयम।् Both take लोप: by 1-3-9 त�य लोपः। Since this धातु: has ञकारः

as an इत,् as per 1-3-72�वjरत�ञतः क��Lभ]ाये w:याफले, it is उभयपदI।


धा + लँt 3-2-123 = धा + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= धा + तस ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108. तस ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= धा + शप ्+ तस ्3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= धा + तस ्2-4-75 = धा + धा + तस ्6-1-10

= ध + धा + तस ्7-4-59

= ध + ध ्+ तस ्6-4-112 (Note: Since the साव�धातुक-]Yयय: ‘तस’् is अ�पत,् by 1-2-4 it behaves

�ङaत ्– as if it has ङकार: as a इत।् This allows 6-4-112 to apply)

= द + ध ्+ तस ्8-4-54

= ध + ध ्+ तस ्8-2-38. Note: Normally, as per 8-2-1, the दकारादेश: done by 8-4-54 should not be

visible to 8-2-38. But then 8-2-38 would become useless – the conditions required for its

application would never occur. So by the fact that पा6ण1न: has composed (वचनसाम या�त)् 8-2-38,

it has to be given a chance to apply and hence it is allowed to see the operation done by 8-4-54.

118

Also note that 8-2-40 झष�तथोध\ऽधः could not apply here because it contains the exclusion

‘अध:’। It doesn’t apply in the case of this धातु:।

= ध + ध ्+ तः 8-2-66, 8-3-15

= ध + त ्+ तः 8-4-55 = ध"ः।

416) वा1त �कम ्– इर इYसCDा वाrया । ‘इर’् should get the इत-्सCDा ।

By this वा1त �कम,् the term ‘इर’् gets the इत-्सCDा in verbal roots such as √1नज ्(6णिजँर ्

शौचपोषणयोः ३. १२), √�वज(्�विजँर ्पथृ�भावे ३. १३) etc. The इकारः and रेफः could have got इत-्

सCDा by 1-3-2 उपदेशेऽजननुाLसक इत ्and

1-3-3 हल�Yयम ्respectively. But doing that would make a verbal root such as √1नज ्(6णिजँर ्

शौचपोषणयोः ३. १२) an इ(दत ्(that which has इकारः as इत)्। By 7-1-58 इ(दतो नुम ्धातोः, a धातःु

which has इकारः as an इत ्gets the नुँम-्आगमः। In order to stop the नुँम-्आगमः, this वा1त �कम ्

declares the entire term ‘इर’् of a verbal root as a single इत।्

उदाहरणम ्– √1नज ्(जुहोYया(द-गणः, 6णिजँर ्शौचपोषणयोः, ३. १२)

The ‘इर’् in 6णिजँर ्gets the इत-्सCDा by the वा1त �कम ्– इर इYसCDा वाrया and takes लोप: by 1-3-

9 त�य लोपः। The beginning णकारः is replaced by a नकारः by 6-1-65 णो नः, so only ‘1नज’्

remains.

The इकार: in the ‘इर’् of ‘6णिजँर’् has a �वjरत-�वर: in the धात-ुपाठ:। Therefore by 1-3-72, this धातु:

is उभयपदI। In the example below it has taken a पर�मैपद-]Yयय:।

417) 7-4-75 6णजां �याणां गुणः /ौ

व�ृ"ः 6णि� वि� वषामk यास� य गुणः � याrÅलौ । When ‘/ु’ follows, the reduplicate (अkयासः – ref. 6-1-

4 पूव\ऽkयासः) of the three verbal roots √1नज ्(जुहोYया(द-गणः, 6णिजँर ् शौचपोषणयोः, ३.

१२), √�वज ्(जुहोYया(द-गणः, �विजँर ्पथृ�भावे, ३. १३) and √�वष ्(जुहोYया(द-गणः, �वष ॢ ँ{या`ौ, ३. १४)

gets a गुणः substitution. As per the following पjरभाषा-सू�म ्1-1-3, the इक् letter of the अkयास: will

take the गुणः substitution.

418) 1-1-3 इको गुणवFृी

व�ृ"ः व�ृFगुणौ �वसंDया Lश�यमाणौ इक एव �थाने वे(दत{यौ। When a गुणः or व�ृF: substitution is

prescribed using the term ‘गुण’ or ‘व�ृF’, then it should be understood to be in place of a इक् letter

only.

उदाहरणम ्– नेने�� √1नज ्(जुहोYया(द-गणः, 6णिजँर ्शौच-पोषणयोः, ३. १२), लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-


1नज ्+ लँt 3-2-123

= 1नज ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

119

= 1नज ्+ 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= 1नज ्+ 1त 1-3-3

= 1नज ्+ शप ्+ 1त 3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= 1नज ्+ 1त 2-4-75 = 1नज ्+ 1नज ्+ 1त 6-1-10

= 1न + 1नज ्+ 1त 7-4-60 = ने + 1नज ्+ 1त 7-4-75

= ने + नेज ्+ 1त 7-3-86 = ने + नेग ्+ 1त 8-2-30

= ने + नेक् + 1त 8-4-55 = नेने��।

419) 7-3-87 नाkय�त�या�च �प1त साव�धातकेु

व�ृ"ः लघूपधगुणो न � यात ्। There is no गुणः substitution in place of the penultimate लघु letter

(vowel) of a reduplicated verbal (अkय�तम)्, when followed by a अजा(द: (beginning with a vowel)

साव�धातकु-]Yययः which is a �पत ्।

उदाहरणम ्– ने1नजा1न √1नज ्(जुहोYया(द-गणः, 6णिजँर ्शौच-पोषणयोः, ३. १२), ल¾t, कत�jर ]योगः, उ"म-


1नज ्+ ल¾t 3-3-162 = 1नज ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= 1नज ्+ Lमप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-107 Lमप ्gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= 1नज ्+ Lम 1-3-3 = 1नज ्+ 1न 3-4-89

= 1नज ्+ आt 1न 3-4-92, 1-1-46 = 1नज ्+ आ1न 1-3-3

= 1नज ्+ शप ्+ आ1न 3-1-68, शप ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= 1नज ्+ आ1न 2-4-75 = 1नज ्+ 1नज ्+ आ1न 6-1-10

= 1न + 1नज ्+ आ1न 7-4-60 = ने + 1नज ्+ आ1न 7-4-75

= ने1नजा1न 7-3-87 stops 7-3-86.

Note: 7-3-87 also applies in the form अने1नजम ्(लँE, कत�jर ]योगः, उ"म-पुSषः, एकवचनम।्)

420) 3-1-69 (दवा(दkयः pयन ्

व�ृ"ः शपोऽपवादः । The pयन-्]Yयय: is placed after the verbal roots belonging to the (दवा(द-गणः,

when followed by a साव�धातकु-]Yयय: that is used signifying the agent. This सू�म ्is a अपवाद:

(exception) to 3-1-68 कत�jर शप ् ।

उदाहरणम ्– दI{य1त √(दव-्धातुः ((दवा(द-गणः, (दवु ँ

:¸डा�विजगीषा{यवहारuु1त�त1ुतमोदमद�वXनकाि�तग1तष,ु धात-ुपाठः #४. १), लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-पुSषः,


The ending उकार: (which is an इत ् by 1-3-2) of ‘(दवु’ँ has a उदा"-�वर: in the धात-ुपाठ:।

Therefore 1-3-12 doesn’t apply and this धातु: is thus devoid of any indications for bringing in

आYमनेपद-]Yयया:। So by the default सू�म ्1-3-78, it will take पर�मैपद-]Yयया: in कत�jर ]योग:।

(दव ्+ लँt 3-2-123

= (दव ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= (दव ्+ 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ्gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

120

= (दव ्+ 1त 1-3-3

= (दव ्+ pयन ्+ 1त 3-1-69, pयन ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= (दव ्+ य + 1त 1-3-3, 1-3-8 (Note: Since the साव�धातकु-]Yयय: ‘pयन’् is अ�पत,् by 1-2-4 it behaves

�ङaत ्– as if it has ङकार: as a इत।् This allows 1-1-5 to prevent 7-3-86 from applying.)

= दIव ्+ य + 1त 8-2-77 = दI{य1त

421) 7-3-71 ओतः pय1न

व�ृ"ः लोपः � यात ्। The ending ओकारः of an अEगम ्is elided when followed by the pयन-्]Yयय:।

उदाहरणम ्– pय1त √शो-धातुः ((दवा(द-गणः, शो तनूकरणे, धात-ुपाठः # ४. ४०), लँt, कत�jर ]योगः,

]थम-पुSषः, एकवचनम।्

The धातु: ‘शो’ has no इत ्letters in the धात-ुपाठ:। It is devoid of any indications for bringing in

आYमनेपद-]Yयया:। So by the default सू�म ्1-3-78, this धातु: will take पर�मैपद-]Yयया: in कत�jर

]योग:।

शो + लँt 3-2-123

= शो + ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= शो + 1तप ्3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, 1तप ्gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= शो + 1त 1-3-3

= शो + pयन ्+ 1त 3-1-69, pयन ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= शो + य + 1त 1-3-3, 1-3-8

= श ्+ य + 1त 7-3-71 = pय1त

422) 7-3-79 Dाजनोजा�

व�ृ"ः अनयोजा�देशः � यािr छ1त । The verbal roots √Dा (Dा अवबोधने ९. ४३) and √जन ्(जनी«

]ादभुा�वे ४. ४४) are substituted by ‘जा’ when followed by a Lशत-्]Yययः ।

गीतासु उदाहरणम ्– /ोकः Bg1-29 – जायते √जन-्धातुः ((दवा(द-गणः, जनी« ]ादभुा�वे, धात-ुपाठः # ४.

४४), लँt, कत�jर ]योगः, ]थम-पुSषः, एकवचनम।्

The ending ईकार: (which is an इत ्by 1-3-2) of ‘जनी«’ has a अनदुा"-�वर: in the धात-ुपाठ:।

Therefore by 1-3-12, this धातु: will take आYमनेपद-]Yयया: in कत�jर ]योग:।

जन ्+ लँt 3-2-123

= जन ्+ ल ्1-3-2, 1-3-3

= जन ्+ त 3-4-78, 1-4-101, 1-4-102, 1-4-108, त gets साव�धातकु-सCDा by 3-4-113

= जन ्+ ते 3-4-79

= जन ्+ pयन ्+ ते 3-1-69, pयन ्which is a Lशत,् gets साव�धातुक-सCDा by 3-4-113

= जन ्+ य ते 1-3-3, 1-3-8

= जायते 7-3-79, 1-1-55

Ashtadhyayi of Panini on Bhagavad Gita part 1

Documents

Transcript of Ashtadhyayi of Panini on Bhagavad Gita part 1